Lexus GS300 2005 Owner's Manual

FOREWORD

Congratulations on your selection of this Lexus. In Lexus vehicles we have invested all our engineering and design resources; all the know–how we have gained in over 60 years of making automobiles; the highest motivation of our most talented employees; and our tradition of incessant striving toward ever greater quality.

This Owner’s Manual explains the features of your new Lexus. Please read it and follow the instructions carefully so that you can enjoy many years of safe motoring.

When it comes to service, remember that your Lexus dealer knows your vehicle very well and is interested in your complete satisfaction. Your Lexus dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.

If there is not a Lexus dealer near you, or you need emergency assistance for any reason, please call the following number:

U.S. OWNERS

When traveling in the U.S. mainland or Canada:

Lexus Roadside Assistance 1–800–25–LEXUS (Toll–Free)

(1–800–255–3987)

HAWAII:

Lexus Customer Service Assistance 1–800–25–LEXUS (Toll–Free)

(1–800–255–3987)

CANADIAN OWNERS

When traveling in Canada or the U.S. mainland:

Lexus Roadside Assistance/Customer Service 1–800–26–LEXUS (Toll–Free)

(1–800–265–3987)

Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.

All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

i

ii

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR LEXUS

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

YOUR LEXUS

Occupant restraint systems

Lexus encourages you and your family to take the time to read

Section 1–6 of this Owner’s Manual carefully. In terms of helping you understand how you can receive the maximum benefit of the occupant restraint systems this vehicle provides,

Section 1–6 of this Owner’s Manual is the most important section for you and your family to read.

Section 1–6 describes the function and operation concerning seats, seat belts, SRS airbags and child restraint systems of this vehicle and some potential hazards you should be aware of. These systems work together along with the overall structure of this vehicle in order to provide occupant restraint in the event of a crash. The effect of each system is enhanced when it is used properly and together with other systems. No single occupant restraint system can, by itself, provide you or your family with the equal level of restraint which these systems can provide when used together. That is why it is important for you and your family to understand the purpose and proper use of each of these systems and how they relate to each other.

The purpose of all occupant restraint systems is to help reduce the possibility of death or serious injury in the event of a collision. None of these systems, either individually or together, can ensure that there is no injury in the event of collision. However, the more you know about these systems and how to use them properly, the greater your chances become of surviving an accident without death or serious injury.

Seat belts provide the primary restraint to all occupants of the vehicle, and every occupant of the vehicle should wear seat belts properly at all times. Children should always be secured in child restraint systems that are appropriate for their age and size. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) airbags are, as their names imply, designed to work with, and be supplemental to, seat belts and are not substitutes for them. SRS airbags can be very effective in reducing the risk of head and chest injuries by preventing contact of the head and chest with interior portions of the vehicle.

In order to be effective, the SRS airbags must deploy with tremendous speed. The rapid deployment of the SRS airbags makes the SRS airbags themselves potential sources of serious injury if an occupant is too close to an airbag, or if an object or some part of his or her body has been placed between the occupant and the airbag at the time of deployment. This is just one example of how the instructions in Section 1–6 of this Owner’s Manual will help ensure proper use of the occupant restraint systems, and increase the safety they can provide to you and your family in the event of an accident.

Lexus recommends you to read the provisions in Section 1–6 carefully and refer to them as needed during your time of ownership of this vehicle.

Event data recorder

Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance. Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is a system to record data in a crash or a near car crash event. This is called an Event

Data Recorder (EDR).

The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a crash or a near car crash event, this device records some or all of the following information:

Engine speed

Whether the brake pedal was applied or not

Vehicle speed

To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed

Position of the transmission selector lever

Whether the driver and front passenger wore the seat belts or not

Driver’s seat position

Front passenger’s occupant classification

SRS airbag deployment data

SRS airbag system diagnostic data

The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data recorders, the EDR does not record sound data such as conversation between passengers.


Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:

An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leasing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained

Officially requested by the police or other authorities

Used as a defense for Lexus in a law suit

Ordered by the court

However, if necessary Lexus will:

Use the data for research on Lexus vehicle safety performance

Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing details of the vehicle owner, and only when it is deemed necessary

Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification information to a non–Lexus organization for research purposes

New vehicle warranty

Your new vehicle is covered by the following Lexus limited warranties:

New vehicle warranty

Emission control systems warranty

Others

For further information, please refer to the “Owner’s Guide”,

“Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”.

iii

iv


Your responsibility for maintenance

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure the specified maintenance is performed. Section 5 of this Owner’s Manual gives details of these maintenance requirements. Included in

Section 6 is general maintenance. For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s Manual

Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”.

Important health and safety information about your Lexus

CAUTION

WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. In addition, oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals.

Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus

A wide variety of non–genuine spare parts and accessories for

Lexus vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Lexus vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non–genuine Lexus products. Modification with non–genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.

Spark ignition system of your Lexus

The spark ignition system in your Lexus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference–Causing

Equipment Standard.

Installation of a mobile two–way radio system

As the installation of a mobile two–way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as the multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, cruise control system, anti–lock brake system, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation.

Tires and loading on your Lexus

Underinflated or overinflated tire pressure and the excess load may result in the deterioration of steering ability and braking ability, leading to an accident. Check the tire inflation pressure periodically and be sure to keep the load limits given in this Owner’s Manual. For details about tire inflation pressure and load limits, see page 292 and 214.


Scrapping of your Lexus

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your

Lexus contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.

v

vi

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL


The contents of this manual are explained briefly on this page to help you make the best use of the manual. Please read this page and the rest of the Owner ’s Manual carefully to make sure you fully understand the operation of your vehicle.

This will help you enjoy safe and comfortable driving.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

The table of contents and the pictorial index provide easy reference to the appropriate pages.

BASIC OPERATION – QUICK REFERENCE

Operation of basic equipment is briefly explained in an easily understandable way for quick reference.

SECTION 1 – INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

The vehicle’s equipment is divided into the 7 groups listed below. Use of the equipment is explained, including any points you should pay particular attention to.

1. Keys and doors

2. Switches

3. Gauges, meters and service reminder indicators

4. Interior equipment

5. Exterior equipment

6. Occupant restraint systems

7. Steering wheel and mirrors

SECTION 2 – AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO

The features of the vehicle’s air conditioning and audio are explained in detail. Be sure to read this section so that you can make full use of them.

SECTION 3 – STARTING AND DRIVING

Starting the engine, driving, stopping, operation of features affecting vehicle handling, hints on vehicle safety and safe driving techniques are all explained. Please read everything in this section, and remember – drive safely!

SECTION 4 – IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

This section explains what to do in the event of an urgent situation such as the engine not starting or getting a flat tire, etc. If such a problem occurs, check the contents of this

Owner’s Manual and follow the instructions given.

SECTION 5 – MAINTENANCE

This section explains the importance of regular maintenance.

Regular and periodic inspection and maintenance of your

Lexus will help to keep your vehicle in its best condition.

SECTION 6 – SERVICE PROCEDURES AND

SPECIFICATIONS

Simple maintenance procedure and service data are provided here for your reference should you wish to perform inspection and maintenance yourself.

INDEX

The page number is listed for each item in the Owner’s Manual so that you can rapidly find the item and page you are searching for.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

The information you need to know for appropriate servicing at the gas station is provided here.

QUICK INDEX

This is designed so that you can quickly find the needed information when an urgent situation arises.

Safety symbol


Safety and vehicle damage warnings

In this manual you will see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings.

These are used in the following ways:

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Lexus and its equipment.

Your Lexus Owner ’s Manual provides you with a considerable amount of information. To use this information most effectively, please take the time to familiarize yourself with the contents and use of the manual.

In this manual, you will also see a circle with a slash through it. This means ”Do not”, ”Do not do this”, or ”Do not let this happen”.

vii

viii


GAS STATION INFORMATION

Fuel selection:

Select premium unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher for optimum engine performance. However, if such premium type cannot be obtained, you may temporarily use unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating as low as 87 (Research

Octane Number 91).

Fuel tank capacity:

75 L (19.8 gal., 16.5 lmp.gal.)

Engine oil:

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent

Oil grade: API grade SL “Energy–Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil.

Recommend oil viscosity – SAE 5W–30 if normal temperatures are below 38 C (100 F)

Oil capacity: L (qt., lmp.qt.)

Drain and refill with filter

GS430 GS300

5.2 (5.5, 4.6) 5.4 (5.7, 4.8) without filter 4.9 (5.2, 4.3) 5.1 (5.4, 4.5)

See page 270 for detailed information.

Engine coolant:

Capacity: GS430: 9.0 L (9.5 qt., 7.9 lmp.qt.)

GS300: 7.7 L (8.1 qt., 6.8 lmp.qt.)

Coolant type – ”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non–silicate, non–amine, non–nitrite, and non–borate coolant with long–life hybrid organic acid technology (Coolant with long–life hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and organic acids.)

Do not use plain water alone.

For checking the engine coolant, see page 274.

Automatic transmission:

Fluid type – “Toyota Genuine ATF Type T–IV”

See page 280 or 284 for detailed information.

Tire information:

See page 292 through 311 for detailed information.

Tire inflation pressure:

Tire size: GS430 – 225/55R16 94V or 235/45ZR17

GS300 – P215/60R16 94V or 225/55R16 94V

Tire inflation pressure: cold tires kPa (kgf/cm 2 or bar, psi)

Tire size

P215/60R16 94V

225/55R16 94V

235/45ZR17

Front

210 (2.1, 30)

220 (2.2, 32)

230 (2.3, 33)

Rear

210 (2.1, 30)

220 (2.2, 32)

230 (2.3, 33)

For sustained high speeds above 160 km/h (100 mph), in countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add the tire inflation pressure given below to the front tires and rear tires, but never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure molded on the tire sidewall.

P215/60R16 94V

225/55R16 94V

235/45ZR17

90kPa (0.9 kgf/cm 2 or bar, 13 psi)



x

PICTORIAL INDEX

INSTRUMENT PANEL (Vehicles with navigation system)

PG100

11

12

13

Page

1 Door lock switch and power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 34

2 Driving position memory switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

3 Instrument panel light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

4 Side vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

5 Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

6 Coin box (Vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

Headlight cleaner switch

(Vehicles sold in Canada)

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

64

32

7 Headlight, turn signal and fog light switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 28, 29

8 Wiper and washer switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

9 Automatic air conditioning controls . . . . . . . . . . 142

10 Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

14

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . 45

Center vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Navigation system including air conditioning controls and audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . (See “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”)

PICTORIAL INDEX

15

16

17

18

19

28

29

30

31

23

24

25

26

27

20

21

22

Page

Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Glove box/CD automatic changer . . . . . . . . . . 59/168

Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Vehicle stability control system

OFF switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Seat heater switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Driving pattern selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Cruise control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Steering pad switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Parking brake release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Hood lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Trunk lid opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Fuel filler door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Power rear view mirror control switches . . . . . . 134

For detailed information, refer to the description given in each Section.

xi

xii

PICTORIAL INDEX

INSTRUMENT PANEL (Vehicles without navigation system)

PG005g

Page

1 Door lock switch and power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 34

2 Driving position memory switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

3 Instrument panel light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

4 Side vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

5 Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

6 Coin box (Vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

Headlight cleaner switch

(Vehicles sold in Canada)

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

64

32

7 Headlight, turn signal and fog light switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 28, 29

8 Wiper and washer switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

9 Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

10

11

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . 45

12

13

Center vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Automatic air conditioning controls . . . . . . . . . . 142

PICTORIAL INDEX

14

15

16

17

18

27

28

29

30

22

23

24

25

26

19

20

21

Page

Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Glove box/CD automatic changer . . . . . . . . . . 59/168

Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63


OFF switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Seat heater switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Driving pattern selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Cruise control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Steering pad switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Parking brake release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Hood lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Trunk lid opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Fuel filler door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Power rear view mirror control switches . . . . . . 134


xiii

xiv

PICTORIAL INDEX

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (GS430 sold in U. S. A.)

PG006b

Page

1 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

2 Turn signal indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

3 Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

4 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

5 Automatic transmission indicator lights . . . . . . 187

6 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

7 ODO/TRIP, RESET button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

8 Low fuel level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

9 Headlight indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

10

11

Headlight high beam indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Slip indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199, 200

12

13

14

15

Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Low engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . 47

Discharge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

PICTORIAL INDEX

16

17

18

19

22

23

24

25

26

20

21

27

28

Page

Driver’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

SRS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Open door warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50


OFF indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Anti–lock brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . 49

Vehicle stability control system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Snow mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Power mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Cruise control indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Rear light failure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Automatic headlight leveling system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Low engine oil level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48


xv

xvi

PICTORIAL INDEX

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (GS300 sold in U. S. A.)

PG016e

Page

1 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41


3 Shift position indicator for manual control . . . . 191




7 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40



10

Headlight indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

11


12

13

14

15





PICTORIAL INDEX

16

17

18

19

20

23

24

25

26

27

21

22

28

29

Page






OFF indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200











xvii

xviii

PICTORIAL INDEX

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (GS430 sold in Canada)

PG007f

Page

1 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41





6 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40



9 Tail light indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

10

11



12

13

14

15





PICTORIAL INDEX

16

17

18

19

22

23

24

25

26

20

21

27

28

Page




Vehicle stability control system OFF

indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200











xix

xx

PICTORIAL INDEX

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (GS300 sold in Canada)

PG017g

Page

1 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41


3 Shift position indicator for manual control . . . . 191




7 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40



10

Tail light indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

11


12

13

14

15





PICTORIAL INDEX

16

17

18

19

20

23

24

25

26

27

21

22

28

29

Page





Vehicle stability control system OFF

indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200











xxi

xxii

PICTORIAL INDEX

SEAT AND STEERING WHEEL

PG003b

Page

1 Tilt and telescopic steering adjustment switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

2 Seat position, seat cushion angle and height control switch . . . . 79, 80

3 Seatback angle control switch . . . 79

4 Lumbar support control switch . . 80


EXTERIOR VIEW

PG020f

PICTORIAL INDEX

Page

1 Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . . 33

2 Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

3 Moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

4 Wiper and washer . . . . . . . . . . 30, 325

5 Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

6 Outside rear view mirror . . . . . . . 133

7 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

8 Tire and wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

9 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 331

10 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68


xxiii

xxiv

PICTORIAL INDEX

BASIC OPERATION

QUICK REFERENCE

Driver’s seat

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

Steering wheel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

Automatic transmission (GS430)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

Automatic transmission (GS300)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

Headlight and turn signal switches

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

Wiper switch

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

1

QUICK REFERENCE

1. DRIVER’S SEAT

2

Seat adjustment

Seat position

Seat cushion angle BG001–3

Seat cushion height

Seatback angle

Lumbar support

Head restraint height

Head restraint angle

2. STEERING WHEEL

TILT STEERING WHEEL

BG002c

To tilt the steering wheel up or down to the desired angle, push the control switch in the required direction and release the button when the steering wheel reaches the desired angle.

TELESCOPIC STEERING WHEEL

BG003c

To move the steering wheel to the desired position, push the control switch away from you or pull it toward you until the steering wheel reaches the desired position.

QUICK REFERENCE

3. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION(GS430)

OPERATION OF SELECTOR LEVER

BG018a

SELECTOR LEVER POSITION

P: Parking, engine starting and key removal

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Normal driving (with overdrive on)

4: Engine braking*

3, 2: Stronger engine braking

L: Maximum engine braking

BG007b

Shift while pressing the brake pedal. (Ignition switch must be in the ”ON” position.)

*When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift from ”D” to “4”, engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. For the operation to decrease the vehicle speed, see page 198.

3

QUICK REFERENCE

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION(GS300)

BG023

OPERATION OF SELECTOR LEVER

4

SELECTOR LEVER POSITION


R: Reverse

N: Neutral


M: Manual shifting up or down shifting*



BG020b

Shift while pressing the brake pedal. (Ignition switch must be in the ”ON” position.)

*When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift from ”D” to “4”, engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. For the operation to decrease the vehicle speed, see page 198.

4. HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL

SWITCHES

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

With the ignition OFF

Parking, tail, license plate, side marker and instrument panel lights turn on.

Headlights also turn on.

00L013

Automatic light control

With the engine started and parking brake released

Parking, tail, license plate, side marker and instrument panel lights turn on.

Headlights also turn on

00L013

Automatic light control

QUICK REFERENCE

HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH

Headlight flasher

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Lane change

(Right or left)

5

6

QUICK REFERENCE

5. WIPER SWITCH

Mist wiper operation

Intermittent operation

Low speed operation

00L016

High speed operation

Washer on

SECTION

1

– 1

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Keys and doors

Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine immobilizer system

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

11

Wireless remote control

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13

Doors

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19

Theft deterrent system

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21

7

KEYS AND DOORS

KEYS

11g045a

8

1 Master keys (black) – These keys work in every lock.

For your Lexus dealer to make a new key with a built–in transponder chip, your dealer will need one of them.

2 Sub key (gray) – This key will not open the trunk, trunk main switch and the glove box. For your Lexus dealer to make a new key with built–in transponder chip, your dealer will need it.

3 Key number plate – Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.

A transponder chip for the engine immobilizer system has been placed in the head of the master and sub keys. These chips are required for the system to function correctly, so be careful not to lose these keys. If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to cancel the system or start the engine.

To protect items locked in the trunk or glove box when using valet parking, leave the sub key with the attendant.

Since the doors and trunk lid can be locked without a key, you should always carry a spare master key in case you accidentally lock your keys inside the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if you need additional keys, duplicates can be made by a Lexus dealer using the key number.

We recommend writing down the key number and storing it in a safe place.

Flat key

KEYS AND DOORS

Starting the engine using a flat key

11g039c 11g036c

As a transponder chip is built in its key case, you can start the engine with this key.

The flat key works in every lock.

A transponder chip for the engine immobilizer system has been placed in the key case of the flat key. This chip is required for the system to function correctly, so be careful not to lose this key. If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to cancel the system or start the engine.

Insert your key plate in its key case as shown. We recommend that you always carry this with you for emergency use. Do not leave it in your vehicle.

1. Remove the key plate from the key case.

2. Insert the key plate into the ignition switch. The indicator light keeps flashing.

3. Bring the key case closer to the ignition switch within 10 seconds as indicated by the arrow head. The indicator light goes out. This means the engine immobilizer system is automatically canceled. (For details, see “Engine immobilizer

system” on page 11.) You can put the key case away then. You

cannot cancel the engine immobilizer system if 10 seconds have passed after you inserted the key plate. You need to remove the key plate from the ignition switch and try it again from the step 2.

4. Start the engine within 60 seconds after the security indicator light goes out. You cannot start the engine if 60 seconds have passed after the security indicator went off. You need to remove the key plate from the ignition switch and try it again from the step 2.

9

10

KEYS AND DOORS

NOTICE

Do not let the key case become bent as the key plate may fall out or become bent also.

The flat key is designed for emergency use only. So do not use it regularly instead of other master keys.

11R055

11L021-2

When using a key containing a transponder chip, observe the following precautions:

When starting the engine, do not use the key with a key ring resting on the key grip and do not press the key ring against the key grip. Doing so may prevent the engine from starting, or may cause the engine to stop soon after it starts.

When starting the engine, do not use the key in proximity with other transponder keys (including the flat key and keys of other vehicles), and do not press other key plates against the key grip. Doing so may prevent the engine from starting, or may cause the engine to stop soon after it starts. If this happens, remove the key once and then insert it again after removing other transponder keys (including the flat key and keys of other vehicles) from the ring or while gripping or covering them with your hand to start the engine.

KEYS AND DOORS

ENGINE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM

11G035c w11L016

Do not bend the key grip or flat key.

Do not cover the key grip or flat key with any material that cuts off electromagnetic waves.

Do not knock the key or flat key hard against other objects.

Do not leave the key or flat key exposed to high temperatures for a long period, such as on the dashboard or hood under direct sunlight.

Do not put the key or flat key in water or wash it in an ultrasonic washer.

Do not use the key or flat key with electromagnetic materials.

The engine immobilizer system is a theft prevention system. When you insert the key in the ignition switch, the transponder chip in the key’s head transmits an electronic code to the vehicle. The engine will start only when the electronic code in the chip corresponds to the registered

ID code for the vehicle.

The system is automatically set when the key is removed from the ignition switch. At this time, the security indicator light flashes. When you insert the key in the ignition switch, the security indicator light goes out and the system is canceled automatically, which enables the engine to start.

The transponder chip of the flat key is in its key case. You can cancel the engine immobilizer system using the flat key. (For

details, see “Flat key” on page 9.)

11

12

KEYS AND DOORS

For your Lexus dealer to make you a new key with a built–in transponder chip, your dealer will need your key number and master key or the flat key. However, there is a limit to the number of additional keys your Lexus dealer can make for you.

If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to cancel the system or start the engine.

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

FCC ID: MOZ RI–4ATY

MADE IN JAPAN

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complies with RSS–210 of Industry

Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL*

11L027b

1 Locking the doors and sounding an alarm

2 Unlocking the doors and opening the windows and moon roof

3 Indicator light

4 Unlocking the trunk lid

NOTE: *This feature can be deactivated as vehicle theft deterrent measure in case of the loss of the wireless remote control key. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.

When you operate any button on the key, push it slowly and surely. At this time, the indicator light on the key grip flashes once.

The operational range of the wireless remote control is approximately 1 meter (3 ft.). The effective range may vary with different conditions. To activate the wireless remote control without fail, do it approximately 1 meter (3 ft.) from your

Lexus.

KEYS AND DOORS

In the following cases, the battery in the key may be discharged. If this is the case, replace it using a special screwdriver.

The remote control does not work.

The operational range of wireless remote control becomes extremely short.

The indicator light on the key is dimmed or does not come on.

For the replacement of the battery, see ”Replacing the battery”

on page 17. You can also have the battery of the key replaced

by your Lexus dealer.

If you lose the wireless key, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to avoid the possibility of theft, or an accident.

You can use up to 4 wireless remote control keys for the same vehicle. Contact your Lexus dealer for detailed information.

The wireless remote control key is an electronic component. Observe the following instructions in order not to cause damage to the key.

Do not leave the wireless remote control key in places where the temperature becomes high such as on the dashboard.

Do not disassemble it.

Avoid knocking it hard against other objects or dropping it.

Avoid putting it in water.

13

KEYS AND DOORS

Locking/Unlocking the doors

When you push the ”LOCK” button on the key briefly, all the doors can be locked from outside the vehicle.

When they are locked securely, the emergency flashers will flash and one beep will sound.* However, when you push the

”LOCK” button with any door not closed securely, the buzzer sounds for 10 seconds.** To stop the buzzer, close all the doors securely or push the ”UNLOCK” button. If the key is in the ignition switch, locking cannot be done.

Make sure all the doors are locked when you leave the vehicle.

Push the ”LOCK” button once again. If they were already locked, the turn signal lights will flash.***

NOTE: *The emergency flashers can be set not to flash and beep volume can be changed. **The buzzer can be set not to sound if a door is not closed securely. ***The turn signal lights can be set not to flash. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.

14

NOTICE

Do not push the ”LOCK” button any longer than 2 to 3 seconds. Pushing the button longer activates an alarm.

For details, see page 15.

When you push the ”UNLOCK” button, the driver’s door is unlocked. Pushing that button once again within 3 seconds from the first push, all other doors are also unlocked.*

NOTE: *The 2–step unlocking function can be changed.

Ask your Lexus dealer for details.

At this time, the emergency flashers will flash twice and two beeps will sound.* Together with the activation of unlocking, the interior light comes on for 15 seconds if the interior light switch is in ”DOOR” position.** However, this function does not work when the ignition key is in the ”ON” position. For further information, see ”Interior lights” on page 55.

You have 30 seconds to open a door after using the wireless remote unlock feature.*** If a door is not opened by then, all the doors will be automatically locked again.

Even if the ”LOCK” or ”UNLOCK” button is kept pressed in, the locking or unlocking operation is not repeated. Release the button and then push again.

NOTE: *The emergency flashers can be set not to flash and beep volume can be changed. **The interior light can be set not to come on or the duration of lighting can be changed.

***The time before automatic re–locking can be changed.


KEYS AND DOORS

Unlocking the trunk lid Sounding an alarm*

11G013d 11G002b

When you keep the button pushed for about 1 second, you can unlock the trunk lid.* One beep sounds.

This function does not work when the ignition key is in the ”ON” position.

NOTE: *The operation method can be changed. Ask your

Lexus dealer for details.

When you push the ”PANIC” button for about 2 to 3 seconds, an alarm sounds to deter any person trying to break into or damage your vehicle.

If you want to stop the alarm, push any button.

This function does not work when the ignition key is in the ”ON” position.

NOTE: *The alarm can be set not to sound. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.

15

16

KEYS AND DOORS

Operating the windows and moon roof

The windows and moon roof can be operated using a wireless key from outside the vehicle.*

NOTE: *The windows can be deactivated. The moon roof can be set to slide open, tilt up or deactivated. Ask your

Lexus dealer for details.

11G048a

Push the ”UNLOCK” button until the windows and moon roof start to move. When you release the button, the windows and moon roof stop operating.

This function will work even with the window lock switch pressed in.

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)

This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTICE:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to

Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Replacing the battery

When you replace the battery, prepare a lithium battery

CR1616 or equivalent and a special screwdriver.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to prevent small children from swallowing the removed battery or components.

NOTICE

11L028–1

KEYS AND DOORS

When replacing the battery, be careful not to lose the components, screws and O–ring.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Lexus dealer.

Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.

1. Remove the screw, and then the cover while pushing it in the arrow direction.

17

18

KEYS AND DOORS

11L029–1

2. Remove the module from the key frame.

11L030–1

3. Remove the 2 screws to take out the lid of the module.

4. Take out the discharged battery and put in a new battery with the positive side up.

NOTICE

Make sure the positive side and negative side of the battery are faced correctly.

Do not replace the battery with wet hands. Water may cause unexpected rust.

Do not touch or move any components inside the transmitter, or it may interfere with proper operation.

Be careful not to bend the electrode when inserting the battery and that dust or oils do not adhere to the inside of the module.

Take care not to lose the screws and O–ring.

5. Install the lid with the 2 screws.

NOTICE

Take care not to damage or bend the O–ring when installing.

6. Install the module into the key frame and secure the cover with the screw.

7. When pushing any switch on the wireless key, make sure the indicator light comes on.

Locking with key

DOORS

KEYS AND DOORS

The windows and moon roof can be opened and closed from outside the vehicle using the key. For details, see “Power window switches” on page 34 and “Moon roof” on page 72.

Locking with inside lock button

11G003–1

11G004

1 Lock 2 Unlock

Turn the key towards the front of the vehicle to lock and towards the back to unlock.

The doors lock and unlock simultaneously with either front door. In the driver’s door lock, turning the key once will unlock the driver’s door and twice in succession will unlock all doors simultaneously.* In the passenger’s door lock, turning the key once will unlock all doors simultaneously.

NOTE: *The 2–step unlocking function can be changed.


If a wrong key is used, the key cylinder rotates freely to isolate inside mechanism. So, door locking is protected from thieves.

1 Lock 2 Unlock

Push in the lock button to lock and unlock the door.

The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handles even if the lock buttons are in the locked position.

CAUTION

Do not pull the inside handle of the front doors while driving. The doors will open and an accident may occur.

Lexus strongly recommends that all children be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle.

19

20

KEYS AND DOORS

Closing the door with the lock button pushed in will also lock the door. Be careful not to lock your keys in the vehicle. Doors cannot be locked when either front door is open and the key is in the ignition.

If the vehicle is subjected to a severe frontal, rear or side impact with the ignition switch turned to the “ON” position, all the doors will unlock automatically after a few seconds.

CAUTION

Before driving, make sure the doors are closed and locked, especially when small children are in the vehicle. Along with the proper use of seat belts, locking the doors helps prevent the driver and passengers from being thrown out from the vehicle during an accident.

It also helps prevent the doors from being opened unintentionally.

Locking with power door lock switch

11G005a

1 Lock 2 Unlock

To lock all the doors simultaneously, push the power door lock switch down on the front side. Pushing down on the rear side will unlock them.

The same switch is also found on the front passenger’s side.

Auto door locking function*: All the doors will lock automatically when the selector lever is moved out of “P” position. This auto door locking function is operable while the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position.

NOTE: * This auto door locking function can be disabled or changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.

Locking with rear door child–protector

KEYS AND DOORS

THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM

11G006d 17g005

1 Unlock 2 Lock

Whenever small children are in the vehicle, lock the rear door so that it does not open by the inside door handle.

To do this, turn the knob to the ”LOCK” position as shown and then close the door.

To deter theft of the vehicle, this system is designed to sound an alarm if any of the doors, trunk or hood is forcibly unlocked or the battery terminal is disconnected and then reconnected while the vehicle is locked.

The alarm blows the vehicle’s horn and intermittently flashes the headlights, tail lights and other exterior lights.

21

22

KEYS AND DOORS

17G001a

Security indicator light

Setting the system

1. Turn the ignition key to the ”LOCK” position and remove it.

The engine immobilizer system causes the indicator light to flash.

2. Close and lock all the doors, trunk and hood using an ignition key or wireless remote control.

The flashing indicator light will remain on when all the doors, trunk and hood are closed and locked.

3. After 30 seconds, the indicator starts flashing and the system is set.

Cancelling the system

When you unlock any door or trunk using an ignition key or wireless remote control, the system is cancelled.

Activating the system

The alarm sounds for 60 seconds if any of the following are operated:

Unlocking any door or trunk without using an ignition key or wireless remote control.

Opening the hood forcibly.

Reconnecting the battery.

If any door is unlocked during the alarm sounding, its door is automatically locked.

To stop the alarm: Use either of the following methods.

Unlock the door or trunk using an ignition key or wireless remote control.

Turn the ignition switch on.

Testing the system

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the system as described above.

The front doors should be locked with the ignition key or wireless remote control. Be sure to wait until the indicator light starts flashing.

3. Unlock one of the doors from the inside through one of the opened windows.

The system should activate the alarm.

4. Unlock any of the doors with a key or the wireless remote control to cancel the system.

5. Repeat this operation for the other doors, trunk and hood.

When testing the hood, also check that the system is activated when the battery terminal is disconnected and then reconnected.

If the system does not work properly, have it checked by your

Lexus dealer.

KEYS AND DOORS

NOTICE

Disconnecting the battery may result in the erasure of information you have set in the computer memory. After reconnecting the battery, check that the memorized data has been retained. If it has been erased, input it into the computer once more.

23

24

KEYS AND DOORS

SECTION

1

– 2


Switches

Headlight switch

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Headlight dimmer and turn signal switches

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26

28

Fog light switch

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29

Windshield wiper and washer switches

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30

Headlight cleaner switch

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

32

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

33

Power window switches

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

34

Emergency flasher switch

Seat heater switches

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

37

37

25

SWITCHES

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

12L001

26

To turn the lights on, twist the knob on the end of the lever.

FIRST CLICKSTOP: Only the parking, tail, license plate, side marker and instrument panel lights turn on.

SECOND CLICKSTOP: Headlights also turn on.

THIRD CLICKSTOP (”AUTO”): The headlights and all other lights automatically turn on depending on the darkness of the surroundings.*

Vehicles sold in U.S.A.: When the headlights are on, the headlight indicator lights up in the instrument cluster.

Vehicles sold in Canada: When the tail lights are on, the tail light indicator lights up in the instrument cluster.

Manually twist the knob to the second clickstop to turn on the headlights if they are needed immediately when entering a dark tunnel, parking structure, etc.

When the headlight switch is turned to the first or second clickstop, the brightness of the instrument cluster will be reduced slightly unless the instrument panel light control knob is turned fully on.

NOTE: *The operating condition or sensitivity can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.

12G001

The automatic light control sensor is on top of the driver’s side instrument panel.

Do not place anything on the instrument panel, and/or do not affix anything on the windshield to block this sensor.

When the headlights come on, the lights automatically turn off about 30 seconds after any of the doors is opened and closed with the ignition key turned to the ”ACC” or ”LOCK” position.*

To turn them on again, turn the ignition key to the ”ON” position, or turn the headlight switch off and then twist the knob until the first or second clickstop. If you are going to park for over one week, make sure the headlight switch is off.

When the headlight switch is on with all the doors locked, pushing the ”LOCK” button on the wireless remote control key turns off the headlights.

NOTE: *The time before turning off the lights can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.

SWITCHES

Daytime Running Light System

The headlights turn on at reduced intensity when the parking brake is released with the engine started, even with the light switch in the ”OFF” position. They will not go off until the ignition switch is turned off.

To turn on the other exterior lights and instrument panel lights, twist the knob to the first clickstop.

Twist the knob to the second clickstop to turn on the headlights to full intensity for driving at night.

When setting the knob to the third clickstop (”AUTO”), the headlights will automatically adjust to full intensity and/or turn on the other lights depending on the darkness of the surroundings. Likewise, as the surroundings become brighter, the headlights will turn to reduced intensity, ultimately turning off the other lights.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

27

28

SWITCHES

Automatic headlight leveling system

(Vehicles with discharge headlight only)

HEADLIGHT DIMMER AND TURN

SIGNAL SWITCHES

12G012

12L003

The headlight beam level is always maintained automatically at the proper level in all loading conditions so that your headlights do not dazzle other road users.

If this system fails, the warning light in the instrument cluster comes on. If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by Lexus dealer.

For high beam, push the lever forward. Pull it back for low beam. For the headlight flasher, pull it further back.

A blue light in the instrument cluster indicates high beam or headlight flasher is on.

The headlight flasher works even when the headlight switch is off.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH

SWITCHES

12L004

12L005

For signaling turns, move the lever up or down in the conventional manner.

The ignition key must be in the ”ON” position.

The turn signal is self–cancelling after a turn, but after a lane change, you may have to cancel it by hand. You can also signal a lane change by moving the turn signal lever partway and holding it there.

If the green light in the instrument cluster flashes faster than normal, it indicates that the front or rear turn signal bulb has burned out. If this indicator light does not come on, the fuse or the indicator light itself has probably failed.

To turn on the fog lights, turn the switch to the ”ON” position. They will come on only when the headlights are on low beam.

29

30

SWITCHES

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER

SWITCHES

12L006–1

1 Interval adjuster 2 Washer on

To turn the wipers on, move the lever down until you reach the desired speed setting.


There are 3 settings:

”INT” position: Intermittent operation

”LO” position: Low speed operation

”HI” position: High speed operation

Twist the interval adjuster upward to increase the wiping time interval between sweeps, and downward to decrease it.

The wiper lever must be in the ”INT” position.

For mist wiper operations (a single wipe), pull the lever toward you and release it.

To make the washer squirt, push the button on the end of the lever.

The low washer fluid warning light in the instrument cluster comes on when the fluid level in the tank becomes very low.

For information on adding washer fluid, see ”Adding washer fluid” on page 325.

In cold weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before using the washer. This will help prevent icing, which could block your vision.

NOTICE

Do not operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may scratch the glass.

SWITCHES

Shifting the windshield wiper position

12G007c

12G006

1 Rest position 2 Retracted position

The wiper blades retract under the hood when the wipers are turned off.

In the following cases, the wipers should be shifted from the retracted position to the rest position above the hood level.

When cleaning the windshield

When inspecting or replacing the wipers

When the retraction may be obstructed by snow, etc., at the bottom of the windshield

Other than the above cases, keep the wipers in the retracted position.

More than 10 cm (3.9 in.)

To shift the windshield wipers from retracted to rest position, hold the connection of the wiper arm and wiper blade and pull it upward along the windshield glass with the force of about 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf.).

NOTICE

To prevent the wiper blades from being deformed, be sure to hold the connection of the wiper arm and wiper blade securely.

31

32

SWITCHES

HEADLIGHT CLEANER SWITCH

(CANADA ONLY)

12G008b

12G009

To return the windshield wipers to retracted position, push the connection of the wiper arm and wiper blade downward.

NOTICE

To prevent the wiper blades from being deformed, be sure to hold the connection of the wiper arm and wiper blade securely.

To spray fluid on the headlights, push the switch with the headlights on.


The low washer fluid warning light in the instrument cluster comes on when the fluid level in the tank becomes very low.

For information on adding washer fluid, see ”Adding washer fluid” on page 325.

NOTICE

Do not turn the headlight cleaner on with the washer fluid tank empty. It may cause the cleaner motor to overheat.

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE

REAR VIEW MIRROR DEFOGGER

SWITCH

12G010

To turn the electric rear window defogger on, push the switch.


The thin heater wires on the inside of the rear window and the heater panels in the outside rear view mirrors will quickly clear the surface. Keep your hands off the mirror faces when the switch is on. An indicator light is on when the defogger is operating.

The system will automatically shut off when the defogger has operated about 15 minutes.

SWITCHES

CAUTION

Since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch them when the switch is on.

If further defrosting or defogging is desired, simply actuate the switch again. When the surface has cleared, push the switch once again to turn the defogger off. Continuous use may cause the battery to discharge, especially during stop–and–go driving. The defogger is not designed to dry rain water or to melt snow.

If the outside rear view mirrors are heavily coated with ice, use a spray de–icer before operating the switch.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or connectors.

To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn the switch off when the engine is not running.

33

34

SWITCHES

POWER WINDOW SWITCHES

12L010

12G003a

1 For driver’s window

2 For front passenger’s window

3 For left rear window

4 For right rear window

To raise or lower the windows, use the switch on each door. The passengers’ windows can also be controlled by the switches on the driver’s door.

The power windows work when the ignition key is in the ”ON” position.

Key off operation: Even if the ignition key is turned to the

”ACC” or ”LOCK” position, the window can be operated until any of the doors is opened (or for about 45 seconds).

Operating the switches

To raise or lower the window, pull the switch halfway up or push it halfway down.

Automatic operation: To fully raise or lower the window automatically, pull the switch fully up or push it fully down.

To stop the window partway, lightly push or pull the switch in the opposite direction and then release it.

Operating the window lock switch

SWITCHES

Operating the windows from outside the vehicle

The windows can be operated using an ignition key.*

NOTE: *This feature can be deactivated. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.

12G004a

12L043–1

Indicator light

With the window lock switch pressed in, only the driver’s window can be raised or lowered.

The indicator lights on the switch tell you which of the switches can be operated.

Even with the window lock switch pressed in, the windows will be opened from outside the vehicle using an ignition key or wireless remote control.

Insert the ignition key into the key hole on the driver’s side.

To close the windows: Turn the key in the locking direction and hold it.

After the door is locked, the windows begin to close. To stop in the middle, return the key.

To open the windows: Turn the key in the unlocking direction and hold it.

After the door is unlocked, the windows begin to open. To stop in the middle, return the key.

35

36

SWITCHES

This function will work even with the window lock switch pressed in.

Jam protection function

If something gets caught between the window and window frame during automatic raising operation, key off raising operation or raising operation using the ignition key from the outside, the window stops and is lowered.

If the window receives a strong impact, this function may work even if nothing is caught.

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the following.

Before you close the power windows, always make sure there is nobody around the power windows. You must also make sure the heads, hands and other parts of the bodies of all occupants are kept completely inside the vehicle. If someone’s neck, head or hands get caught in a closing window, it could result in death or serious injury. When anyone closes the power windows, make sure he or she operates the windows safely.

When small children are in the vehicle, never let them use the power window switches without supervision.

Use the window lock switch to prevent them from making unexpected use of the switches.

Be sure to remove the ignition key when you leave your vehicle.

Never leave anyone (particularly a small child) alone in your vehicle, especially with the ignition key still inserted. Otherwise, he/she could use the power window switches and get trapped in a window.

Unattended person (particularly a small child) can be involved in a serious accident.

Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally.

The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window fully closed.

EMERGENCY FLASHER SWITCH

SWITCHES

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

12G005 12G011b

To turn on the emergency flashers, push the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash. The emergency flashers will work with the engine running or off and with or without the ignition key.

Turn on the emergency flashers to warn other drivers if you must stop your vehicle where it might be a traffic hazard.

Always pull your vehicle as far off the road as possible.

The turn signal light switch will not work when the emergency flashers are in operation.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the switch on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

1 For driver’s seat 2 For front passenger’s seat

There is a heater switch for each front seat. Push the front of the switch to turn the heater on and push the rear side to turn it off.


37

38

SWITCHES

CAUTION

Occupants must use caution when operating the seat heater because they may experience minor burns even at low temperatures. Use extra caution for;

Babies, small children, elderly persons, sick persons or persons with physical disabilities

Persons who have delicate skin

Persons who are exhausted

Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs which induce sleep (sleeping drug, cold remedy, etc.)

To prevent the seat from overheating, do not use the seat heater with a blanket, cushion, or other insulating objects which cover the seat.

NOTICE

Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.

When cleaning the seats, do not use organic substances (paint thinner, benzine, alcohol, surface.

To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn the switches off when the engine is not running.

SECTION

1

– 3


Gauges, meters and service reminder indicators

Fuel gauge

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40

Engine coolant temperature gauge

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40

Tachometer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Odometer and trip meter

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

41

42

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

42

Instrument panel light control

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

52

39

GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS

FUEL GAUGE ENGINE COOLANT

TEMPERATURE GAUGE

13G001a

13G009a

40

The gauge indicates the approximate quantity of fuel remaining in the tank when the ignition switch is on.

It is a good idea to keep the tank over 1/4 full.

If the fuel level approaches ”E” or the low fuel level warning light comes on, fill the fuel tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the fuel gauge needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level warning light may come on earlier than usual.

If the fuel tank is completely empty, the malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fill the fuel tank immediately.

The indicator lamp goes off after driving several times. If the indicator lamp does not go off, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

See the inner back cover for fuel capacity and recommended fuel selection.

Normal range

The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature when the ignition switch is on. The engine operating temperature will vary with changes in weather and engine load.

If the needle points to the red zone or higher, stop your vehicle and allow the engine to cool.

Your vehicle may overheat during severe operating conditions, such as:

Driving up a long hill on a hot day.

Reducing speed or stopping after high speed driving.

Idling for a long period with the air conditioning on in stop–and–go traffic.

NOTICE

Do not remove the thermostat in the engine cooling system as this may cause the engine to overheat. The thermostat is designed to control the flow of coolant to keep the temperature of the engine within the specified operating range.

Do not continue driving with an overheated engine.

See ”If your vehicle overheats” on page 225.


TACHOMETER

13G006d

The tachometer indicates engine speed in thousands of rpm (revolutions per minute). Use it while driving to prevent engine over–revving.

Driving with the engine running too fast causes excessive engine wear and poor fuel economy. Remember, in most cases the slower the engine speed, the greater the fuel economy.

NOTICE

Do not let the indicator needle get into the red zone. This may cause severe engine damage.

41

42


ODOMETER AND TRIP METER SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS

AND WARNING BUZZERS

IF THIS INDICATOR OR

BUZZER COMES ON ...

DO THIS.

13G004

(a) or

(Indicator and buzzer)

If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Lexus dealer.

This meter displays the odometer and two trip meters. To change the mode indication, push the ”ODO/TRIP” button.

The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The twin trip meter records two different distances independently.

For example, you can use one meter to calculate the fuel economy and the other to measure the distance on each trip.

To change the trip meter indication from one trip to the other, push the ”ODO/TRIP” button. To set the A trip meter to zero, display the A meter reading, then push the

”RESET” button. The same applies for the B trip meter.

The data of trip meters will be cancelled if the electrical power source is disconnected.

(b)


Fasten driver’s seat belt.

(c)

Fasten front passenger’s seat belt.

(d)

Take vehicle to Lexus dealer immediately.

(e)


BUZZER COMES ON ...

(f)

(g)

(h)

(i) or or

DO THIS.



BUZZER COMES ON ...

DO THIS.

Stop and check.

(j) Close all doors.


Stop and check.

(k) Replace bulb.

Add engine oil.

(l) Add washer fluid.

Take vehicle to Lexus dealer.


If brake system warning light is also on, stop immediately and contact Lexus dealer.

(m)

(n)

Fill up tank.


43

44


When the brake fluid level is low ...


BUZZER COMES ON ...

DO THIS.

(o)

(p) and

Key reminder buzzer


Remove key.

(a) Brake System Warning Light and Buzzer

This light comes on in the following cases when the ignition key is in the “ON” position.

When the parking brake is applied ...

This light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position even after the parking brake is released.

If you drive your vehicle without releasing the parking brake, the buzzer sounds.

CAUTION

It is dangerous to continue driving normally when the brake fluid level is low.

When the hydraulic brake booster fails ...

If the hydraulic booster causes a problem resulting in poor braking performance, the warning light comes on and buzzer sounds continuously.

Have your vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer in the following cases:

The light does not come on even if the parking brake is applied when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.

The light does not come on even if the ignition key is turned on with the parking brake released.

A warning light turned on briefly during operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If either of the following conditions occurs, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.

The light does not turn off even after the parking brake is released while the engine is running.

The warning buzzer comes on together with the warning light.

In either case, this can indicate that the brakes may not work properly and your stopping distance will become longer. Depress the brake pedal firmly and bring the vehicle to an immediate stop.

Any of the following conditions may occur, but do not indicate the malfunction:

The light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. It is normal if it turns off after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the warning light and buzzer. It is normal if the light turns off and the buzzer stops sounding after a few seconds.

You may hear a small sound in the engine compartment after the engine is started or the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly. This is a pump pulsating sound of the brake system, and it is not a malfunction.


(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light and

Buzzer

The light and buzzer act as a reminder to have the driver buckle up the seat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to ”ON” or ”START”, the reminder light flashes and buzzer sounds if the driver’s seat belt is not fastened. Unless the driver fastens the belt, the light continues flashing and the buzzer stops after about 4 to 8 seconds.

(c) Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Reminder

Light

The light acts as a reminder to have the front passenger buckle up the seat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to ”ON” or ”START”, the reminder light flashes if a passenger sits in the front passenger seat and does not fasten the seat belt. Unless the front passenger fastens the belt, the light continues flashing.

However, if a front passenger uses an additional seat cushion, the light may not flash even when the seat belt is not buckled up.

If luggage or other load is placed on the front passenger seat, depending on its weight and how it is placed on the seat, built–in sensors in the seat cushion may detect the pressure, causing the reminder light to flash.

45

46


(d) SRS Warning Light

The indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to the ”ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This means the SRS airbags and seat belt pretensioners are operating properly.

The SRS warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, occupant detection sensor, seat belt buckle switch, front seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light, interconnecting wiring and power sources.

If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the parts monitored by the warning light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.

When the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, the light does not come on, remains on for more than 6 seconds or flashes.

The light comes on or flashes while driving.

If the light stays on, it indicates that the SRS driver and front passenger airbags have a problem. If the light flashes, the

SRS side and curtain shield airbags and/or seat belt pretensioners have a problem.

(e) Discharge Warning Light

This light warns that the battery is being discharged.

If it comes on while you are driving, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine, and check for the cause. Look first at the engine drive belt.

If it is loose or broken, the generator will not charge the battery properly.

If the belt is O.K., there is a problem somewhere in the charging system.

The engine ignition will continue to operate, however, until the battery is discharged. Turn off the air conditioning, blower, radio, etc., and drive directly to the nearest Lexus dealer or repair shop.

NOTICE

Do not continue driving if the engine drive belt is broken or loose.

(f) Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light warns that the engine oil pressure is too low.

If it flickers or stays on while you are driving, pull off the road to a safe place and stop the engine immediately. Call a Lexus dealer or qualified repair shop for assistance.

The light may occasionally flicker when the engine is idling or it may come on briefly after a hard stop. There is no cause for concern if it then goes out when the engine is accelerated slightly.

The light may come on when the oil level is extremely low. It is not designed to indicate low oil level, and the oil level must be checked using the oil level dipstick.


(g) Low Engine Oil Level Warning Light

This light warns that the engine oil level is too low. Add oil as soon as possible. (For instructions, see ”Checking the engine oil level” on page 270.)

While driving on steep inclines or rough roads which causes the vehicle to substantially sway or on curves, this light may come on due to the movement of engine oil in the engine.

In normal conditions, due to engine oil consumption, this light may come on earlier than the specified service interval of the scheduled maintenance. This is because the engine oil is consumed to the low level within the scheduled maintenance interval and does not indicate a problem. (For detailed information, see “Facts about engine oil consumption” on page

268.)

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with the warning light on – even for one block. It may ruin the engine.

NOTICE

Continued engine operation with low engine oil will damage the engine.

47

48


(h) Malfunction Indicator Lamp

This lamp comes on when the ignition key is turned to the

“ON” position and goes off after the engine starts. This means that the warning light system is operating properly.

If the lamp remains on, or the lamp comes on while driving, first check the followings:

Empty fuel tank

If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immediately.

Loose fuel tank cap

If the fuel tank cap is loose, securely tighten it.

These cases are temporary malfunctions. The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips.

If the lamp does not go off even after several trips, contact your

Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

If the fuel tank is not empty or the fuel tank cap is not loose...

There is a problem somewhere in the engine, emission control system, electronic throttle control system, automatic transmission electrical system or warning light system itself.

Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.

GS430

If this lamp comes on and engine speed does not increase when the accelerator pedal is depressed, there may be a problem somewhere in the electronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. However, if you depress the accelerator pedal more firmly and slowly, you can drive your vehicle at low speeds. Have your Lexus checked by your

Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronic throttle control system is corrected during low speed driving, the system may not be recovered until the engine is stopped and the ignition key is turned to “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

GS300

If this lamp comes on and engine speed does not increase when the accelerator pedal is depressed down to about the middle position, there may be a problem somewhere in the electronic throttle control system.

At this time, if you depress the accelerator pedal more firmly and slowly, you can drive your vehicle at low speeds. Have your Lexus checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronic throttle control system is corrected during low speed driving, the system may not be recovered until the engine is stopped and the ignition key is turned to “ACC” or “LOCK” position.


Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs

Your vehicle may not pass a state emission inspection if the malfunction indicator lamp remains on. Contact your Lexus dealer to check your vehicle’s emission control system and

OBD (On–Board Diagnostics) system before taking your vehicle for the inspection.

For details, see “Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs” on page 247.

(i) ”ABS” Warning Light

The light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. If the anti–lock brake system and the brake assist system work properly, the light turns off after a few seconds.

Thereafter, if either of the systems malfunctions, the light comes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the anti–lock brake system, the brake assist system, the traction control system and/or the vehicle stability control system do/does not operate, but the brake system still operates conventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the anti–lock brake system does not operate so that the wheels could lock up during a sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces.

If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the parts monitored by the warning light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.

The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, or remains on.

The light comes on while you are driving.

49

50


A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not indicate a problem.

Either of the following conditions may occur, but do not indicate the malfunction:


Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light. It is normal if it turns off after a few seconds.

(j) Open Door Warning Light and Buzzer

This light remains on until all the doors are completely closed.

The buzzer sounds if you drive your vehicle with the doors not closed completely.

(k) Rear Light Failure Warning Light

If this light comes on when the headlight switch is turned on (at the first or second clickstop), it indicates that one or more of the tail lights are burned out.

If it comes on when the brake pedal is depressed, one or more stop lights are burned out.

Have defective bulbs replaced as soon as possible.

(l) Low Washer Fluid Warning Light

This light comes on when the fluid level in the tank becomes very low. Fill the tank as soon as possible.

(m) Low Fuel Level Warning Light

This light comes on when the fuel level in the tank becomes very low. Fill the tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the low fuel level warning light may come on earlier than usual.

(n) Automatic Headlight Leveling System

Warning Light

This light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the automatic headlight leveling system.

If it comes on, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.

(o) Vehicle Stability Control System Warning

Lights

These lights warn that there is a problem somewhere in the vehicle stability control system or traction control system.

If the ”VSC” warning light and ”VSC OFF” indicator light come on, have your vehicle checked by Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

The lights will come on when the ignition key is turned to ”ON”, and will go off after about a few seconds.

The lights may stay on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. It is normal if they go out after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the lights.

It is normal if they go out after a few seconds.

If the ”VSC” warning light and ”VSC OFF” indicator light come on, the vehicle stability control system does not activate, however, it is no problem to continue your driving.

(p) Key Reminder Buzzer

This buzzer acts as a reminder to remove the key when you open the driver’s door with the ignition key in the ”ACC” or

”LOCK” position.


How to check all the service reminder indicators

(except the low fuel level warning light):

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Open the door.

The following service reminder indicator should come on. It goes off when you close the door completely.

3. Turn the ignition key to ”ON”.

The following service reminder indicators should come on.

or or or

51

52


The following service reminder indicators go off after a few seconds.

or

INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT

CONTROL

13G005

The following service reminder indicator goes off after about 6 seconds.

The lights other than the slip indicator light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. It is normal if they go out after a while.

If any service reminder indicator or warning buzzer does not function as described above, have it checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

The brightness of the instrument panel lights is automatically adjusted depending on the brightness of your surroundings. To adjust the brightness as you like, turn the knob. However, if the brightness is automatically adjusted at the maximum, turning the knob cannot change the brightness.

When the headlight switch is in the first or second click stop, you can also adjust the brightness of the displays on the audio and air conditioning systems using this knob.

SECTION

1

– 4


Interior equipment

Vanity mirrors

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

54

Interior lights

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

55

Personal lights

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

55

Ignition switch light

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

56

Clock

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

56

Cigarette lighter and ashtray

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

57

Power outlet

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

58

Rear console box

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

59

Glove box

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

59

Garage door opener

Cup holders

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

60

63

Coin box

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tie–down hooks

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

64

64

Floor mat

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

65

First–aid kit holder

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

66

53

54

INTERIOR EQUIPMENT

VANITY MIRRORS

Sun visors

14G001 14G002

To use the vanity mirrors, swing the sun visor down and open the cover.

The vanity light comes on when you open the cover.

1 To block out glare from the front , swing the sun visor down.

2 To block out glare from the side, remove the sun visor from the hook and swing it to the side.

3 To block out glare coming obliquely from behind you, slide the visor backwards.

At this position, the vanity light does not come on.

INTERIOR LIGHTS


PERSONAL LIGHTS

Front

14G003a

14G004a

To turn on the interior light, slide the switch.

With the switch in the ”DOOR” position, the light comes on when any door is opened. After all the doors are closed, the light remains on for about 15 seconds and then goes out.

However, in the following cases, the light goes out immediately:

1. All the doors are closed when the ignition key is in ”ACC” or

”ON” position.

2. The ignition key is turned to ”ACC” or ”ON” when the light is still on.

3. All the doors are locked when the light is still on.

4. One door is closed with the lock button pushed in while the other doors are locked.

Rear

14G006

To turn on the personal light, push the switch. To turn it off, push the switch again.

55

56


IGNITION SWITCH LIGHT CLOCK

14G005 14G007

For easy access to the ignition switch, the ignition switch light comes on when any of the doors are opened.

The light remains on for about 15 seconds and goes out after all the doors are closed. However, the light goes out immediately when all the doors are locked or the ignition key is in the ”ACC” or ”ON” position.

The digital clock indicates the time with the ignition key at the ”ACC” or ”ON” position. To reset the hour, press the

”H” button. To reset the minutes, press the ”M” button.

To adjust the time to the nearest hour, press the ”:00” button.

For example, if the ”:00” button is pressed when the time is between 9:30 – 9:59 or between 10:01 – 10:29, the time will change to 10:00.

With the tail lights on, the background brightness of the time indication will be reduced.

If the electrical power source has been disconnected from the clock, the time display will automatically be set to 1:00.


CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND

ASHTRAY

14G009

14G008e

Front cigarette lighter and ashtray

To use the cigarette lighter and ashtray, first push against the ashtray cover. Then when the ashtray opens out, press in the cigarette lighter. After it finishes heating up, it automatically pops out ready for use.

Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in.

If the engine is not running, the ignition key must be in the

”ACC” position to use the lighter.

When finished with your cigarette, thoroughly extinguish it in the ashtray to prevent other cigarette butts from catching fire.

After using the ashtray, push it back in completely.

To remove the ashtray, just pull it up.

Use a Lexus genuine cigarette lighter or equivalent for replacement.

Rear ashtray

To use the ashtray, pull on the lid.

When finished with your cigarette, thoroughly extinguish it in the ashtray to prevent other cigarette butts from catching fire.

After using the ashtray, push it back in or close the lid completely.

To remove the ashtray, just pull it up.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or sudden stop while driving, always close the ashtray completely after use.

57

58


POWER OUTLET

14L020a

The power outlet is designed for power supply for car accessories.

The ignition key must be in the ”ACC” or ”ON” position for the power outlet to be used.

NOTICE

To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the electricity over the total vehicle capacity of 12V 3.5A.

To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use. Inserting anything other than an appropriate plug that fits the outlet, or allowing any liquid to get into the outlet may cause electrical failure or short circuits.

REAR CONSOLE BOX


GLOVE BOX

14g029a 14G010

1 For upper box 2 For lower box

To use the rear console box, open as shown in the illustration.

1 Unlock 2 Open 3 Lock

To open the glove box door, pull the lever. To lock the glove box door, insert the master key and turn it clockwise.

With the tail lights on, the glove box light will come on when the glove box door is open.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, always keep the glove box door closed while driving.

59

60


GARAGE DOOR OPENER

The garage door opener ( Universal

Transceiver) is manufactured under license from

HomeLink and can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, and security systems, etc.

(a) Programming the HomeLink

14G015–1

1 Buttons 2 Indicator light

The HomeLink in your vehicle has 3 buttons and you can store one program for each button.

To ensure correct programming into the HomeLink , install a new battery in the hand–held transmitter prior to programming.

The battery side of the hand–held transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink during the programming process.

For Canadian users, follow the procedure in “Programming an entrance gate/Programming all devices in the Canadian market”.

1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink buttons you want to program.

2. Place your hand–held garage transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to

3 in.) away from the surface of the HomeLink .

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink in view while programming.

3. Simultaneously press and hold the hand–held garage transmitter button along with the selected HomeLink button.

4. When the indicator light on the HomeLink changes from a slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both buttons.

5. Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly programmed button. If programming a garage door opener, check to see if the garage door opens and closes.

If the garage door does not operate, identify if your garage transmitter is of the “Rolling Code” type. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button. The garage door has the rolling code feature if the indicator light (on the HomeLink ) flashes rapidly and then remains lit after 2 seconds. If your garage transmitter is the “Rolling Code” type, proceed to the heading “Programming a rolling code system”.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each remaining HomeLink button to program another device.

Programming a rolling code system

If your device is “Rolling Code” equipped, it is necessary to follow steps 1 through 4 under the heading

“Programming the HomeLink ” before proceeding with the steps listed below.

1. Locate the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may vary by brand of garage door opener. Refer to the owner’s guide supplied by the garage door opener manufacturer for the location of this “training” button.

2. Press the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor.

Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3 below.

3. Press and release the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink button twice. The garage door may open. If the door does open, the programming process is complete. If the door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third press and release will complete the programming process by opening the garage door.

The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize the HomeLink unit and be able to activate the garage door up/down.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each remaining HomeLink button to program another rolling code system.


Programming an entrance gate /

Programming all devices in the Canadian market

1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink buttons you want to program.

2. Place your hand–held gate/device transmitter 25 to 75 mm

(1 to 3 in.) away from the surface of the HomeLink .

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink in view while programming.

3. Press and hold the selected HomeLink button.

4. Continuously press and release (cycle) the hand–held gate/device transmitter button every two seconds until step 5 is complete.

5. When the indicator light on the HomeLink changes from a slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both buttons.

6. Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.

7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each remaining HomeLink button to program another device.

Programming other devices

To program other devices such as home security systems, home door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus dealer for assistance.

61

62


Reprogramming a button

Individual HomeLink buttons cannot be erased, however, to reprogram a single button, follow the procedure “Programming the HomeLink ”.

(b) Operating the HomeLink

To operate the HomeLink , press the appropriate HomeLink button to activate the programmed device. The HomeLink indicator light should come on. The HomeLink continues to send the signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.

(c) Erasing the entire HomeLink memory

(all three programs)

To erase all previously programmed codes at one time, press and hold down the 2 outside buttons for 20 seconds until the indicator light flashes.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the HomeLink memory.

CAUTION

When programming the HomeLink Universal

Transceiver, you may be operating a garage door or other device. Make sure people and objects are out of the way of the garage door or other device to prevent potential harm or damage.

Do not use this HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards. (This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.) A garage door opener which cannot detect an object

(signaling the door to stop and reverse), does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases risk of serious injury or death.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS–210 of the IC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING: This transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device.


CUP HOLDERS

14G012

14G011b

Front

To use the cup holder, push the cup holder lid.

You can use it as an accessory box by removing the holder inside.

CAUTION

Do not place anything else other than cups or drink–cans in the cup holder, as such items may be thrown about in the compartment and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an accident.

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or sudden stop while driving, keep the cup holder closed when not in use.

Rear

To use the cup holder, push the cup holder portion of the center armrest in the rear seat.

The cup holder is designed for holding cups or drink–cans securely.

CAUTION

Do not place anything else other than cups or drink–cans in the cup holder, as such items may be thrown about in the compartment and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an accident.

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or sudden stop while driving, keep the cup holder closed when not in use.

63

64


COIN BOX

(U.S.A.ONLY)

TIE–DOWN HOOKS

14G049a

14g030

To use the coin box, push against the coin box cover.

CAUTION

Keep the coin box closed when not in use.

To secure your luggage, use the tie–down hooks as shown above.

See “Cargo and luggage” on page 215 for precautions in loading luggage.

CAUTION

To avoid personal injury, keep the tie–down hooks stored under the carpet when not in use.


FLOOR MAT

14G013–1

14G025a

Use a floor mat of the correct size.

If the floor carpet and floor mat have 2 holes, then they are designed for use with locking clips. Fix the floor mat with locking clips into the holes in the floor carpet.

CAUTION

Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the floor carpet. If the floor mat slips and interferes with the movement of the pedals during driving, it may cause an accident.

65

66


FIRST–AID KIT HOLDER

14G050

1 To loosen 2 To tighten

This belt is designed to hold the first–aid kit.

To loosen: Pull the buckle forward.

To tighten: Pull on the belt.

Make sure the first–aid kit is securely held.

SECTION

1

– 5


Exterior equipment

Hood

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trunk lid

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

68

69

Fuel tank cap

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

71

Moon roof

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

72

67

68

EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT

HOOD

15G013b

15G001

1. To open the hood, pull the hood lock release lever under the instrument panel. The hood will spring up slightly.

2. Insert your fingers under the hood, push up the auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, check to see that you have not forgotten any tools, rags, etc. Then lower the hood and make sure it locks.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the hood is closed and securely locked. Otherwise, the hood may open unexpectedly while driving and an accident may occur.

TRUNK LID


Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Un supervised children may lock themselves in the vehicles or trunk and suffer serious injuries or death.

Trunk lid opener

15G003–1

15G004

To unlock the trunk lid, insert the master key and turn it clockwise.

To close the trunk lid, lower it and press down on it. After closing the trunk lid, try pulling it up to make sure it is securely closed.

The trunk lid can be unlocked using the wireless remote control key. For details, see page 15.

CAUTION

Keep the trunk lid closed while driving. This not only keeps the luggage from being thrown out, but also prevents exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.

Always lock the trunk lid and all doors, and keep away the vehicle keys out of children’s reach.

1 Main switch 2 Operative 3 Inoperative

To open the trunk lid while sitting in the driver’s seat, pull the lever with the main switch not pushed in.

69

70


Internal trunk release handle

15G005

15g027a

1 If you do not want to activate the trunk lid opener system, push in the main switch.

2 To activate the system, insert the master key and turn it counterclockwise.

To protect things put in the trunk, when you have your vehicle parked, push in the main switch.

If a person is locked in the trunk, he/she can pull down the phosphorescent handle on the inside of trunk lid to open the trunk lid.

The phosphorescent (glow–in–the–dark) handle will continue to glow for a time after the trunk lid is closed. Exposing the handle to stronger light will cause it to glow longer.


FUEL TANK CAP

15G007a

15G006

1. To open the fuel filler door, pull the lever under the instrument panel.

When refueling, turn off the engine.

CAUTION

Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames when refuelling. The fumes are flammable.

When opening the cap, do not remove the cap quickly. In hot weather, fuel under pressure could cause injury by spraying out of the filler neck if the cap is suddenly removed.

2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn the cap slowly counterclockwise, then pause slightly before removing it.

The removed cap can be stored on the back side of the fuel filler door.

It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh when the cap is opened. When installing the cap, turn the cap clockwise until you hear a click.

If the cap is not installed securely, the malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Make sure the cap is installed securely.

The indicator lamp goes off after driving several times. If the indicator lamp does not go off, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

71

72


CAUTION

Make sure the cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

Use only a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap for replacement. It is designed to regulate fuel tank pressure.

In case the opener is not actuated

MOON ROOF

15G011–1

15G008a

Pull the manual lever toward the back.

This is used in case the fuel filler door cannot be opened due to a discharged battery or other trouble.

1 Open 2 Close

To slide open the moon roof, push the switch toward the back. The moon roof will fully open. To stop partway, push the same switch or ”TILT” switch.

The sun shade can be opened or closed manually. However, if you open the moon roof, the sun shade will be opened with the moon roof.

To close the moon roof, push the switch toward the front.

The moon roof will fully close. To stop partway, push the same switch or ”TILT” switch.

15G012–1

1 Tilt up 2 Lower

To tilt up the rear end of the moon roof fully, push the switch on the rear side or on the front side to lower it.

To operate the moon roof, the ignition key must be in the ”ON” position.

Key off operation: Even if the ignition key is turned to the

”ACC” or ”LOCK” position, the moon roof can be operated until any of the doors is opened (or for about 45 seconds).


Operating the moon roof from outside the vehicle

The moon roof can be closed or opened using an ignition key.*

Insert the ignition key into the key hole on the driver’s door.

To close the moon roof: Turn the key in the locking direction and hold it.

After the door is locked, the moon roof begins to close. To stop in the middle, return the key.

To open the moon roof: Turn the key in the unlocking direction and hold it.

After the door is unlocked, the moon roof begins to open. To stop in the middle, return the key.

NOTE: *This feature can be set inoperative, or sliding open or tilting up can be selected. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.

73

74


Jam protection function

If something gets caught into the roof opening during closing operation, the moon roof stops and is open.

If the moon roof receives a strong impact, this function may work even if nothing is caught.

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the following.

While the vehicle is moving, always keep the heads, hands and other parts of the bodies of all occupants away from the roof opening. Otherwise, they could be seriously injured if the vehicle stops suddenly or if the vehicle is involved in an accident.

Before you close the moon roof, always make sure there is nobody around the moon roof. You must also make sure nobody places his or her head, hands and other parts of the body in the roof opening. If someone’s neck, head or hands get caught in the closing roof, it could result in death or serious injury.

When anyone closes the moon roof, first make sure it is safe to do so.

Be sure to remove the ignition key when you leave your vehicle.

Never leave anyone (particularly a small child) alone in your vehicle, especially with the ignition key still inserted. Otherwise, he/she could use the moon roof switches and get trapped in the roof opening.

Unattended person (particularly a small child) can be involved in a serious accident.

Never sit on top of the vehicle around the roof opening.

Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally.

The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof fully closed.

SECTION

1

– 6


Occupant restraint systems

Seats

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

76

Head restraints

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

81

Seat belts

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

82

SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

92

SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

101

Child restraint

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

110

Driving position memory system

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

128

75

76

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

SEATS

While the vehicle is being driven, all vehicle occupants should have the seatback upright, sit well back in the seat and properly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

Do not drive the vehicle unless the occupants are properly seated. Do not allow any passengers to sit in the luggage compartment or cargo area. Persons not properly seated and/or not properly restrained by seat belts can be severely injured in the event of emergency braking or a collision.

During driving, do not allow any passengers to stand up or move around between seats. Otherwise, severe injuries can occur in the event of emergency braking or a collision.

Front seat precautions

Driver seat

CAUTION

The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway

Traffic Safety Administration (”NHTSA”) advises:

Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 50–75 mm (2–3 in.) of inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10 in.) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 250 mm (10 in.) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways:

Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.

Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 250 mm

(10 in.) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non–slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.

If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward.

This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as recommended by

NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.

Front passenger seat

CAUTION

The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.


Front seats

CAUTION

The SRS side airbags are installed in the driver and front passenger seats. Observe the following precautions.

Do not lean against the front door when the vehicle is in use, since the side airbag inflates with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, you may be killed or severely injured.

Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, causing death or serious injury.

Do not modify or replace the seats or upholstery of the seats equipped with side airbags. Such change may prevent the side airbag system from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

77

78


Seat adjustment precautions

CAUTION

Do not adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Be careful that the seat does not hit a passenger, luggage or the rear seat.

NOTICE

Do not operate the control switch in more than one dimension at a time. It may cause electrical overload.

Adjusting front seats

16G001–1

1 Seat position control switch, seat cushion angle and

height control switch

2 Seatback angle control switch

3 Lumbar support control switch

Adjusting seat position


Adjusting seatback angle

16G002 16G003

Move the control switch in the desired direction.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat in that position. Do not place anything under the seat, as this might interfere with the seat movement.


Releasing the switch will stop the seatback in that position.

CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback any more than needed.

The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal or rear collision when the driver and the front passenger are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt. In the event of a frontal collision, the more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of death or personal injury .

79

80


Adjusting seat cushion angle and height Adjusting lumbar support

16G004–2 16G005


Releasing the switch will stop the seat cushion in that position.

Push the control switch on either side.

The amount of lumbar support will change while the switch is pushed.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

For your safety and comfort, adjust the head restraint before driving.

Front seats


CAUTION

Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is closest to the top of your ears.

After adjusting the head restraint, make sure it is locked in position.

Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

Rear seats

16G006–1

16G007

To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, press the lock release button and push the head restraint down. To move the head restraint forward or rearward, pull or push on the top.

The head restraint is most effective when it is close to your head. Therefore, using a cushion on the seatback is not recommended.

Outside rear seats

To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, press the lock release button and push the head restraint down. To move the head restraint forward or rearward, pull or push on the top.

81

82


16G009–1

Center rear seat

To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, press the lock release button and push the head restraint down.

Center rear head restraint: When an occupant sits on the center rear seat, always pull up the head restraint to the lock position.

The head restraint is most effective when it is close to your head. Therefore, using a cushion on the seatback is not recommended.

CAUTION

Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is closest to the top of your ears.

After adjusting the head restraint, make sure it is locked in position.

Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

SEAT BELTS

Seat belt precautions

Lexus strongly urges that the driver and passengers in the vehicle be properly restrained at all times with the seat belts provided. Failure to do so could increase the chance of injury and/or the severity of injury in accidents.

The seat belts provided for your vehicle are designed for people of adult size, large enough to properly wear them.

Child. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the

vehicle’s seat belts. See ”Child restraint” on page 110 for

details.

If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the rear seat and must be restrained using the vehicle’s seat belt. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

If a child must sit in the front seat, the seat belts should be worn properly. If an accident occurs and the seat belts are not worn properly, the force of the rapid inflation of the airbag may cause severe injury to the child.

Do not allow any children to stand up or kneel on either rear or front seats. An unrestrained child could suffer serious injury or death during emergency braking or a collision. Also, do not let the child sit on your lap. Holding a child in your arms does not provide sufficient restraint.

Pregnant woman. Lexus recommends the use of a seat belt.

Ask your doctor for specific recommendations. The lap belt should be worn securely and as low as possible over the hips and not on the waist.

Injured person. Lexus recommends the use of a seat belt.

Depending on the injury, first check with your doctor for specific recommendations.

CAUTION

Persons should ride in their seats properly wearing their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.

Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer serious bodily injury or death in the event of sudden braking or a collision.

When using the seat belts, observe the following:

Use the belt for only one person at a time. Do not use a single belt for two or more people – even children.

Avoid reclining the seatback any more than needed.

The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal or rear collision when the driver and the front passenger are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt.

In the event of a frontal collision, the more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of death or personal injury.


Be careful not to damage the belt webbing or hardware. Take care that they do not get caught or pinched in the seat or doors.

Inspect the belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Damaged parts should be replaced. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Keep the belts clean and dry. If they need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Never use bleach, dye, or abrasive cleaners, or allow them to come into contact with the belt – they may severely weaken the belts. (See “Cleaning the interior” on page 340 for instructions.)

Replace the belt assembly (including bolts) if it has been used in a severe impact. The entire assembly should be replaced even if damage is not obvious.

83

84


Fastening front and rear seat belts

16G016

Adjust the seat as needed and sit up straight and well back in the seat. To fasten your belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert the tab into the buckle.

You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle.

The seat belt length automatically adjusts to your size and the seat position.

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It also may lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend, and you can move around freely.

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and is then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system securely. (For details, see ”Child restraint” on

page 110.) To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then

pull the belt out once more.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the retractor, firmly pull the belt and release it. You will then be able to smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor.

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the belt is not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent you from properly latching the tab and buckle.

If the seat belt does not function normally, immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use the seat until the seat belt is fixed, because it cannot protect an adult occupant or your child from injury.


16G017 16G018a

Adjust the position of the lap and shoulder belts.

1 Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips – not on your waist.

2 Adjust it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulder portion upward through the latch plate.

CAUTION

Both high–positioned lap belts and loose–fitting belts could cause serious injuries due to sliding under the lap belt during a collision or other unintended event. Keep the lap belt positioned as low on hips as possible.

Do not place the shoulder belt under your arm.

Adjust the shoulder anchor position to your size.

To raise the anchor position, push the anchor up. To lower the anchor position, support the anchor while you push the lock release button then slide the anchor down. After adjustment, make sure the anchor is locked in position.

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause serious injuries in a collision.

85

86


Seat belt comfort guides

16G019

16g316

To release the belt, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract.

If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it out and check for kinks or twists. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.

The seat belt comfort guides are installed on the outside rear seats to relieve uncomfortableness from the shoulder belt when it is applied closer to a child’s neck (at the age of 10 or so), by pulling the shoulder belt a little forward.

Slide the seat belt comfort guide forward to adjust the shoulder belt.

The seat belt comfort guide should not be in the forward position for other purposes.

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child’s neck, and should not fall off the child’s shoulder. Failure to observe these precautions could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt in an accident, causing death or serious injury.


Seat belt extender

If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Lexus dealer free of charge.

Please contact your local Lexus dealer so that the dealer can order the proper required length for the extender. Bring the heaviest coat you expect to wear for proper measurement and selection of length. Additional ordering information is available at your Lexus dealer.

CAUTION

When using the seat belt extender, observe the following precautions. Failure to follow these instructions could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt restraint system in case of an accident, increasing the chance of personal injury.

Remember that the extender provided for you may not be safe when used on a different vehicle, for another person, or at a different seating position than the one originally intended.

Be sure to wear the seat belt without the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender.

87


Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of collision.

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt and the seat belt extender are not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent you from properly latching the tab and buckle.

If the seat belt does not function normally, immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use the seat until the seat belt is fixed, because it cannot protect an adult occupant or your child from injury.

16G055

88

To connect the extender to the seat belt, insert the tab into the seat belt buckle so that the ”PRESS” signs on the buckle release buttons of the extender and the seat belt are both facing outward as shown.

You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle.

When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt. This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and extender itself.

When not in use, remove the extender and store in the vehicle for future use.


Seat belt pretensioners

16G134a

16G132b

The driver and front passenger seat belt pretensioners are designed to be activated in response to a severe frontal impact.

When the sensor detects a severe frontal impact, the front seat belts are quickly drawn back by the retractor so that the belts snugly restrain the front seat occupants.

The front passenger seat belt pretensioners will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat.

However, the front passenger seat belt pretensioner may activate if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is buckled up regardless of the presence of the occupant in the seat.

The seat belt pretensioners and SRS airbags may not operate together in all collisions.

1 Front airbag sensors

2 Seat belt pretensioner assemblies

3 SRS warning light

4 Airbag sensor assembly

5 Occupant detection sensor

6 Seat belt buckle switch

The seat belt pretensioner system consists mainly of the above components, and their locations are shown in the illustration.

The seat belt pretensioners are controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensor.

When the seat belt pretensioners are activated, an operating noise may be heard and a small amount of non–toxic gas may be released. This does not indicate that a fire is occurring. This gas is normally harmless.

Once the seat belt pretensioners have been activated, the seat belt retractors remain locked.

89

90


CAUTION

Do not modify, remove, strike or open the seat belt pretensioner assemblies, airbag sensor or surrounding area or wiring. Failure to follow these instructions may prevent the seat belt pretensioners from activating correctly, cause sudden operation of the system or disable the system, which could result in death or serious injury. Consult your Lexus dealer about any repair and modification.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following changes without consulting your Lexus dealer. Such changes can interfere with proper operation of the seat belt pretensioners in some cases.

Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile two–way radio, cassette tape player or compact disc player.

Repairs on or near the front seat belt retractor assemblies.

Modification of the suspension system.

Modification of the front end structure.

Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow, winches or any other equipment to the front end.

Repairs made on or near the front fenders, front end structure or console.

16G022

This indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This means the seat belt pretensioners are operating properly.

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, occupant detection sensor, seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details, see ”Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on page 42.)


If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.



If any seat belt does not retract or cannot be pulled out due to a malfunction or activation of the relevant seat belt pretensioner.

The seat belt pretensioner assembly or surrounding area has been damaged.

16G136

In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

The front of the vehicle (shaded in the illustration) were involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the seat belt pretensioners to operate.

The seat belt pretensioner assembly or surrounding area is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

91


SRS DRIVER AIRBAG AND FRONT

PASSENGER AIRBAG

16G020c

92

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags are designed to provide further protection for the driver and front passenger in addition to the primary safety protection provided by the seat belts.

In response to a severe frontal impact, the SRS front airbags work together with the seat belts to help reduce injury by inflating. The SRS front airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s head or chest caused by hitting the vehicle interior.

The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is buckled up, regardless of the presence of an occupant in the seat.

Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

The SRS front airbag system is designed only as a supplement to the primary protection of the driver and front passenger seat belt systems. The driver and front passenger can be killed or seriously injured by the inflating airbags if they do not wear the available seat belts properly. During sudden braking just before a collision, an unrestrained driver or front passenger can move forward into direct contact with or close proximity to the airbag which may then deploy during the collision. To ensure maximum protection in an accident, the driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an accident reduces the chances of death or serious injury or being thrown out of the vehicle. For instructions and precautions concerning the seat

belt system, see ”Seat belts” on page 82.

Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by the deploying airbags. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle and properly restrained.

The rear seat is the safest for infants and children.

For instructions concerning the installation of a child

restraint system, see ”Child restraint” on page 110 .


The SRS front airbags are designed to deploy in severe

(usually frontal) collisions where the magnitude and duration of the forward deceleration of the vehicle exceeds the designed threshold level.

The SRS front airbags will deploy if the severity of the impact is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision in the U.S.A. and 30 km (18 mph) collision in Canada when the vehicle has the impact straight into a fixed barrier that does not move or deform.

However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in which the front of the vehicle ”underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

16G024a

1 Collision from the side 2 Collision from the rear

3 Vehicle rollover

The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low–speed frontal collision.

But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the

SRS front airbags may occur.

93

94


16G108 16G144c

1 Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface.

2 Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

3 Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

1 Airbag module for front passenger

(airbag and inflator)

2 Airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator)



5 Front airbag sensors



The SRS front airbag system consists mainly of the above components, and their locations are shown in the illustration.

The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensors.

The front airbag sensors constantly monitor the forward deceleration of the vehicle. If an impact results in a forward deceleration beyond the designed threshold level, the system triggers the airbag inflators. At this time a chemical reaction in the inflators very quickly fills the airbags with non–toxic gas to help restrain the forward motion of the occupants. The front airbags then quickly deflate, so that there is no obstruction of the driver’s vision should it be necessary to continue driving.

When the airbags inflate, they produce a loud noise and release some smoke and residue along with non–toxic gas.

This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may remain inside the vehicle for some time, and may cause some minor irritation to the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation with soap and water. If you can safely exit from the vehicle, you should do so immediately.


Deployment of the airbags happens in a fraction of a second, so the airbags must inflate with considerable force. While the system is designed to reduce serious injuries, primarily to the head and chest, it may also cause other, less severe injuries to the face, chest, arms and hands. These are usually in the nature of minor burns or abrasions and swelling, but the force of a deploying airbag can cause more serious injuries, especially if an occupant’s hands, arms, chest or head is in close proximity to the airbag module at the time of deployment.

This is why it is important for the occupant to; avoid placing any object or part of the body between the occupant and the airbag module; sit straight and well back into the seat; wear the available seat belt properly; and sit as far as possible from the airbag module, while still maintaining control of the vehicle.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot for several minutes after deployment, so do not touch! The airbags inflate only once. The windshield may be damaged by absorbing some of the force of the inflating airbag.

95

96


CAUTION

The driver or front passenger who is too close to the steering wheel or dashboard during airbag deployment can be killed or seriously injured. Lexus strongly recommends that:

The driver sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while still maintaining control of the vehicle.

The front passenger sit as far back as possible from the dashboard.

All vehicle occupants be properly restrained using the available seat belts.

For instructions and precautions concerning the seating position, see “Front seat precautions” on page

76.

16G029a

Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard when the vehicle is in use, since the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Anyone who is up against, or very close to, an airbag when it inflates, can be killed or seriously injured. Sit up straight and well back in the seat, and always use your seat belt properly.


16G251 16G031a

Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle and be properly restrained.

Do not allow a child to stand up or kneel on the front passenger seat, since the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force.

Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

Do not hold a child on your lap or in your arms. Use a child restraint system in the rear seat. For instructions concerning the installation of a child

restraint system, see ”Child restraint” on page 110.

Do not put anything or any part of your body on or in front of the dashboard or steering wheel pad that houses the front airbag system. They might restrict inflation or cause death or serious injury as they are projected rearward by the force of the deploying airbags. Likewise, the driver and front passenger should not hold objects in their arms or on their knees.

97

98


Do not modify or remove any wiring. Do not modify, remove, strike or open any components, such as the steering wheel pad, steering wheel, column cover, dashboard near the front passenger airbag, front passenger air bag cover, front passenger airbag or airbag sensor assembly. Doing so may prevent the front airbag system from activating correctly, cause sudden activation of the system or disable the system, which could result in death or serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury. Consult your Lexus dealer about any repair and modification.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following changes without consulting your Lexus dealer. Such changes can interfere with proper operation of the SRS front airbag system in some cases.



Modification of the front end structure.

Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow, winches or any other equipment to the front end.

Repairs made on or near the front fenders, front end structure, console, steering column, steering wheel or dashboard near the front passenger airbag.

16G022

This indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to the ”ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This means the SRS front airbags are operating properly.

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, occupant detection sensor, seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details, see ”Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on page 42.)





If the light stays on, it indicates that the SRS driver and front passenger airbags have a problem. If the light flashes, the SRS side and curtain shield airbags have a problem.

99


16G321

100

In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible:

The SRS front airbags have been inflated.

The front of the vehicle (shaded in the illustration) was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS front airbags to inflate.

The pad section of the steering wheel or front passenger airbag cover (shaded in the illustration) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting your Lexus dealer.

SRS SIDE AIRBAGS AND CURTAIN

SHIELD AIRBAGS

16G500

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) side airbags and curtain shield airbags are designed to provide further protection for the driver and front passenger in addition to the primary safety protection provided by the seat belts.

In response to a severe side impact, the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags work with the seat belts to help reduce injury by inflating. The SRS side airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s chest and the SRS curtain shield airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the drivers, front passenger’s head.

The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat.

However, the side airbag on the passenger seat may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is buckled up, regardless of the presence of an occupant in the seat.


The SRS curtain shield airbag is activated even with no passenger in the front seat.

The SRS curtain shield airbags may activate even when the side airbags are not activated.

Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system is designed only as a supplement to the primary protection of the driver and front passenger seat belt systems. To ensure maximum protection in an accident, the driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an accident reduces the chances of death or serious injury or being thrown out of the vehicle. For instructions and precautions concerning the seat belt system, see “Seat belts” on

page 82.

Do not allow anyone to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front pillar or roof side rail from which the SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag deploy even if he/she is a child seated in the child restraint system.

It is dangerous if the SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact of the deploying airbag could cause death or serious injury to the occupant.

101

102


Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by the deploying airbags. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants and children. For instructions concerning the installation of a child restraint system, see “Child

restraint” on page 110.

16G501

1 Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment

2 Collision from the side at an angle

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment as shown in the illustration.

The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are designed to inflate when the passenger compartment area suffers a severe impact from the side.

Always wear your seat belts properly.


16G109 16g324b

1 Collision from the front

2 Collision from the rear

3 Vehicle rollover

The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a front or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low–speed side collision.

1 Side airbag modules (airbag and inflator)

2 Side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies



5 Curtain shield airbag modules (airbag and inflator)



The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system consists mainly of the above components, and their locations are shown in the illustration.

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensors.

In a severe side impact, the side and curtain shield airbag sensor triggers the side and curtain shield airbag inflators. At this time a chemical reaction in the inflators very quickly fills the airbags with non–toxic gas to help restrain the lateral motion of the occupants.

103

104


When the airbags inflate, they produce a fairly loud noise and release some smoke and residue along with non–toxic gas.

This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may remain inside the vehicle for some time, and may cause some minor irritation to the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation with soap and water. If you can safely exit from the vehicle, you should do so immediately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in a fraction of a second, so the airbags must inflate with considerable force. While the system is designed to reduce serious injuries, it may also cause minor burns or abrasions and swelling.

Front seats as well as the part of the front pillar, and roof side rail may be hot for several minutes, but the airbags themselves will be hot. The airbags are designed to inflate only one.

CAUTION

SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate with considerable force. To reduce the possibility of death or serious injury when they inflate, the driver and front passenger must:

Wear their seat belts properly.

Remain properly seated with their backs upright and against the seats at all times.

16G030–1

Do not allow anyone to lean against the door when the vehicle is in use, since the side airbag and curtain shield airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, he/she may be killed or seriously injured. Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child in the vehicle.

Sit up straight and well back in the seat, distributing your weight evenly in the seat. Do not apply excessive weight to the outer side of the seats with a side airbag, and to the front pillar and roof side rail with a curtain shield airbag.


16g253 16g320a

Do not allow anyone to get his/her head closer to the area where the side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, since these airbags could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, he/she may be killed or seriously injured. Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child in the vehicle.

Do not allow anyone to kneel on the front passenger seat, facing the front passenger’s side door, since the side airbag and curtain shield airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, he/she may be killed or seriously injured. Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child in the vehicle.

Do not allow anyone to get his/her head or hands out of windows since the curtain shield airbags could inflate with considerable speed and force.

Otherwise, he/she may be killed or seriously injured.

Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child in the vehicle.

105

106


16G033d 16G145b

Do not attach a cup holder or any other device or object on or around the door. When the side airbag inflates, the cup holder or any other device or object will be thrown with great force, or the side airbag may not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious injury. Likewise, the driver and front passenger should not hold objects in their arms or on their knees.

Do not attach a microphone or any other device or object around the area where the curtain shield airbag activates such as on the windshield glass, side door glass, front and side pillars and roof side rail and assist grips. When the curtain shield airbag inflates, the microphone or other device or object will be thrown away with great force or the curtain shield airbag may not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious injury.

Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, causing death or serious injury.

Do not modify or replace the seats or upholstery of the seats with side airbags. Such changes may prevent the side airbag system from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

Do not disassemble or repair the front pillar and roof side rails containing the curtain shield airbags. Such changes may disable the system or cause the curtain shield airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury. Consult your Lexus dealer about any repair and modification.


NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following changes without consulting your Lexus dealer. Such changes can interfere with proper operation of the SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system in some cases.



Modification of the side structure of the passenger compartment.

Repairs made on or near the console or front seats.

107

108


16G022

The indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This means the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are operating properly.

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, occupant detection sensor, seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on page 42.




If the light stays on, it indicates that the SRS driver and front passenger airbags have a problem. If the light flashes, the SRS side and curtain shield airbags have a problem.

16g322

In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible:

Any of the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags have been inflated.


The portion of the doors (shaded in the illustration) was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags to inflate.

The surface of the seats with the side airbag (shaded in the illustration) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

The portion of the front pillars or roof side rail garnishes

(padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside

(shaded in the illustration) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting your Lexus dealer.

109

110


CHILD RESTRAINT

Child restraint precautions

Lexus strongly urges the use of appropriate child restraint systems for children.

The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of a child restraint system.

Your vehicle conforms to SAE J1819.

If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the rear seat and must be restrained using the vehicle’s

seat belt. See ”Seat belts” on page 82 for details.

CAUTION

For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system.

In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior.

Lexus strongly urges use of a proper child restraint system which conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

Never install a rear–facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear–facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.

A forward–facing child restraint system should be allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of collision.

Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front pillar or roof side rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in a child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

Child restraint system

A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must carefully consult the manufacturer ’s instructions which accompany the child restraint system.

To provide proper restraint, use a child restraint system following the manufacturer ’s instructions about the appropriate age and size of the child for the child restraint system.

Install the child restraint system correctly following the instructions provided by its manufacturer. General directions are also provided under the following illustrations.

The child restraint system should be installed on the rear seat.

According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.


When not using the child restraint system, keep it secured with the seat belt or place it in the trunk or somewhere other than the passenger compartment. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

Types of child restraint system

Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types depending on the child’s age and size.

(A) Infant seat

(B) Convertible seat

(C) Booster seat

Install the child restraint system following the instructions provided by its manufacturer.

Your vehicle has anchor brackets for securing the top strap of a child restraint system.

For instructions about how to use the anchor bracket, see

“Using a top strap” on page 124.

Child restraint lower anchorages approved for your vehicle may also be used. See “Installation with child restraint lower

anchorages” on page 125.

111

112


(A) Infant seat

16G066a

(B) Convertible seat

16G035

(C) Booster seat

16G037


INSTALLATION WITH 3–POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

(A) Infant seat installation

16G057a

16G066a

An infant seat must be used in rear–facing position only.

CAUTION


113


16g040 16G067

114

If the driver’s seat position does not allow sufficient space for safe installation, install the child restraint system on the rear right seat.

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the infant seat following the instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight.

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt are not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent your child from properly latching the tab and buckle.

If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot protect your child from death or serious injury.

Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. Do not install the child restraint system on the seat until the seat belt is fixed.


16G068 16G069

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode.

When the belt is then retracted even slightly, it cannot be extended.

To hold the infant seat securely, make sure the belt is in the lock mode before letting the belt retract.

3. While pressing the infant seat firmly against the seat cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it will go to hold the infant seat securely.

115

116


16G070 16G042

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.

4. To remove the infant seat, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older child passenger.


(B) Convertible seat installation

16G058–2

16G035

A convertible seat must be used in forward–facing or rear–facing position depending on the age and size of the child. When installing, follow the manufacturer ’s instructions about the appropriate age and size of the child as well as directions for installing the child restraint system.

CAUTION


117


118

16G059–2 16g141

Move seat fully back


Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front pillar or roof side rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in a child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbag and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

If the driver’s seat position does not allow sufficient space for safe installation, install the child restraint system on the rear right seat.


16G046 16G047

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the convertible seat following the instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight.

CAUTION





2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode.

When the belt is then retracted even slightly, it cannot be extended.

To hold the convertible seat securely, make sure the belt is in the lock mode before letting the belt retract.

119

120


16G048 16G049

3. While pressing the convertible seat firmly against the seat cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it will go to hold the convertible seat securely.

CAUTION



(C) Booster seat installation

16G050

16G037

4. To remove the convertible seat, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older child passenger.

A booster seat must be used in forward–facing position only.

121


16G052 16G053

122

Move seat fully back

CAUTION


Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front pillar or roof side rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in a child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbag and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the booster seat and across the child following the instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the belt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly across the child’s shoulder and that the lap belt is positioned as low as possible

on the child’s hips. See ”Seat belts” on page 82 for details.

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from child’s neck, but not falling off child’s shoulder. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.


Both high–positioned lap belts and loose–fitting belts could cause death or serious injuries due to sliding under the lap belt during a collision or other unintended event. Keep the lap belt positioned as low on a child’s hips as possible.

For child’s safety, do not place the shoulder belt under child’s arm.





16G054

2. To remove the child restraint system, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract.

123

124


Using a top strap

16G099b

16G060a

Follow the procedure below for a child restraint system that requires the use of a top strap.

Anchor brackets

Use the anchor bracket on the package tray behind the rear seat to attach the top strap.

Anchor brackets are installed for each rear seating position.


Installation with child restraint lower anchorages

16G078a

16g247

1. Fix the child restraint system with the seat belt.

2. Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top strap.

For instructions to install the child restraint system, see “Types

of child restraint system” on page 111.

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securely latched, and check that the child restraint system is secure by pushing and pulling it in different directions. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.

Lower anchorages for the child restraint systems complying with the FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2

specifications are installed in the rear seat.

The anchorages are installed in the clearance between the seat cushion and seatback of both outside rear seats.

Child restraint system complying with the FMVSS213 or

CMVSS213 specification can be fixed to these anchorages. In this case, it is not necessary to fix the child restraint system with a seat belt on the vehicle.

125


CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM INSTALLATION

16g230e

16g317a

126

Type A

Canada only

Type B

Canada only

1. Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly and confirm the position of the lower anchorages near the button on the seatback.

Type A—

2. Latch the hooks of lower straps onto the anchorages and tighten the lower straps.

Type B—

2. Latch the buckles onto the anchorages

For owners in Canada—The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

If your child restraint system has a top strap, it should be anchored. (For the installation of the top strap, see “Using a top

strap” on page 124.)

For installation details, refer to the instruction manual equipped with each product.


CAUTION

When using the lower anchorages for the child restraint system, be sure that there are no irregular objects around the anchorages or that the seat belt is not caught.


127


DRIVING POSITION MEMORY

SYSTEM

A microcomputer will memorize the position of the driver’s seat, and the positions of the tilt and telescopic steering, and outside rear view mirrors. Two different driving position profiles can be entered into the computer’s memory.

Recording a driving position in the computer’s memory can only be done when the ignition key is in the ”ON” position and the selector lever is in the ”P” position.

Setting the driving position

The beep sound means that the positions are recorded in the computer’s memory.

By repeating these two steps and pressing the remaining button, the driving position for another driver can be recorded.

To set a new memorized position, select the desired position and perform step 2. The previous memory will be erased and the new position will be set.

To make only slight changes to an already memorized position, the easiest way is to first activate the memorized position, then make the desired changes and perform step 2 above.

Recalling the memorized position

16G064a

16G065a

128

1. Adjust the driver’s seat, tilt and telescopic steering and outside rear view mirrors to the desired position.

2. While pushing the ”SET” button, push button ”1” or ”2” until the signal beeps.

When you push button ”1” or ”2”, the driving position will be automatically adjusted to the position recorded for that button.

Conditions for memorized position activation

Ignition key ”ON” and selector lever in ”P” position.

All parts of the memorized positions can be activated.

However, if the brake pedal is being depressed, the seat position will not change.

Key not in ignition switch and within 30 seconds of opening driver’s door.

The memorized position can be activated, except for the tilt and telescopic steering.

If any driving position memory switch is pushed while one of the memorized driving position profiles is being activated, the operation will stop.

To activate the system, push the desired button (”1” or ”2”) again.

The driving position memory control system cannot be operated while the vehicle is moving.

If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, the computer’s memory will be erased and the memorized positions will have to be set again.


CAUTION

Do not start the vehicle while the adjustments are being made.

Take care not to select the wrong button, or the seat could strike the rear passenger or hit your body against the steering wheel. If this happens, you can stop the movement by pressing another driving position memory switch, or depressing the brake pedal.

129

130


SECTION

1

– 7


Steering wheel and mirrors

Tilt and telescopic steering wheel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

132

Outside rear view mirrors

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

133

Inside rear view mirror

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

135

131

132

STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS

TILT AND TELESCOPIC STEERING

WHEEL

Adjustment of steering wheel tilt

Adjustment of telescopic steering column

16G011c

16G010c

To adjust the tilt of the steering wheel, push the control switch upward or downward to set it to the desired position.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

To adjust the steering column length, push the control switch forward or backward to set the steering wheel to the desired position.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the steering column while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

Auto tilt away*


OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRRORS

16G012b 16G013

When the ignition key is removed, the steering column moves forward away from the driver and also tilts up for easy exit and entry.

When the key is inserted in the ignition switch, the steering column returns to the previously set position.

NOTE: *This feature can be deactivated. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.

Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the side of your vehicle in the mirror.

Be careful when judging the size or distance of any object seen in the outside rear view mirror on the passenger’s side because it is a convex mirror. Any object seen in a convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than if seen in a normal flat mirror.

When the inside rear view mirror darkens in ”AUTO” mode, the outside rear view mirrors also darken to reduce the reflection of the headlights of the following vehicle. For details, see

”Inside rear view mirror” on page 135.

When you push the rear window defogger switch, the heater panels in the outside rear view mirrors will quickly clear the mirror surface. (See “Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch” on page 33.)

133


CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving.

Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

Since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch them when the rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch is on.

Power rear view mirror control

NOTICE

If ice should jam the mirror, do not operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de–icer to free the mirror.

Folding rear view mirrors

16G014

16L017-1

134

1 Master switch 2 Control switch

To adjust the power rear view mirror, first place the master switch at ”L” (left) or ”R” (right), and push the control switch on the desired side.

The power rear view mirrors can be adjusted when the key is in the ”ACC” or ”ON” position.

To fold the rear view mirror, push backward.

The rear view mirrors can be folded backward for parking in compact areas.

CAUTION

Do not drive with the mirrors folded backward. Both the driver and passenger side rear view mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving.

INSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR

16G502


When the outside air temperature is low, it may take a little longer for the mirror to darken in response to the detection of headlights.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving.

Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the rear of your vehicle in the mirror.

Pushing the switch changes the mode between ”AUTO” and ”DAY”.

The indicator comes on when the ”AUTO” mode is selected.

”DAY” mode: The mirror surface is normal.

”AUTO” mode: If the mirror detects light from the headlights of the vehicle behind you, the mirror surface darkens slightly to reduce the reflected light.

When the inside rear view mirror surface changes, the outside rear view mirror surfaces will also become darker.

When the ignition key is inserted and turned on, the inside rear view mirror always turns on in the ”AUTO” mode.

16g503

To ensure correct functioning of anti–glare mirror sensors located on both sides of the mirror, do not touch or cover the sensors with your finger or a piece of cloth, etc.

135


Compass (Vehicles without Navigation

System sold in U.S. mainland and Canada)

16g504

136

The compass indicates the direction in which the vehicle is heading. The illustration shown above indicates the vehicle is heading north.

Displays

S

SW

W

NW

N

NE

E

SE

Directions

North

Northeast

East

Southeast

South

Southwest

West

Northwest

Pushing the button for longer than 3 seconds turns on or off the compass display.

The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:

The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.

The compass does not adjust while the vehicle is stopped.

The ignition switch is turned off immediately after turning.

The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

The vehicle is in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields

(underground parking, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof parking, near a crossing, near a large vehicle, etc.).

The vehicle is magnetized. (There is a magnet or a metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)

The battery has been disconnected.

Any door is open.

If the deviation is small, the compass works to calibrate the direction automatically while the vehicle is in motion.

For obtaining additional precision or for complete calibrating, see “CALIBRATING THE COMPASS” below.


NOTICE

Do not put magnets or a metal object near the inside rear view mirror. Doing this may cause malfunction of the compass sensor.

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviation calibration)

The direction display on the compass deviates from the true direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to the geographic position of the vehicle.

To adjust for this deviation, stop the vehicle and push the button for longer than about 6 seconds until the number (1–15) appears on the display. Then push the button again, referring to the following map to select the number of the zone where the vehicle is.

16x657

Zone number

If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the calibration is finished.

137


CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving.

Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circling calibration)

16g222

138

16g505

“C” appears on the display in case the circling calibration is required due to a drastic change in the magnetic field. To rectify this, follow the calibration procedure below.

Drive the vehicle slowly (at 8 km/h (5 mph) or lower) in a circle until the direction is displayed. If there is not enough space to drive in a circle, drive around the block until the direction is displayed.

After driving in 1 to 3 circles in the above method, calibration is complete with the direction shown on the display.

If calibration cannot be performed because of the vehicle is magnetized, take your vehicle to a Lexus dealer.

Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground parking, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof parking, near a crossing, near a large vehicle, etc.).

During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.

CAUTION

When doing the circling calibration, be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.

Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving.

Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.


139

140


SECTION

2

– 1

AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO

Air conditioning

Automatic air conditioning controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

For vehicles equipped with Navigation System, please refer to the separate “Navigation System

Owner’s Manual”.

141

AIR CONDITIONING

AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING CONTROLS

20G001b

142

The automatic air conditioning automatically maintains the set temperature.

In the automatic operation mode, the air conditioning selects the most suitable fan speed, air flow, air intake and on–off of the air conditioning according to the temperature.

The ignition key must be in the “ON” position.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the air conditioning on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

1 Driver side temperature control button

2 Driver side temperature display (in degrees

Fahrenheit or Centigrade)

3 Front windshield button

4 Fan speed display

5 Outside temperature display (in degrees Fahrenheit or Centigrade)

6 Air intake control button

7 Air flow display

8 Air conditioning on–off button

9 Passenger side temperature control button

10

11

12

13

Passenger side temperature display (in degrees

Fahrenheit or Centigrade)

Separate/dual control button

Air flow control button

Fan speed control button

14

15

OFF button

Automatic control button


143


20G002a

144

Air flow selection

See “Lower vent” on page 153.


(a) Climate control

SETTING OPERATION – automatic control

20G003–1

21L003-3

1. Push the ”AUTO” button.

Air flow quantity, switching of the diffusers, on–off of the air conditioning, and switching of the air intake between

RECIRCULATED AIR and OUTSIDE AIR are automatically adjusted. The operation status is shown by each indicator.

When one of the manual control buttons is depressed while operating in automatic mode, the mode relevant to the depressed button is set. Other conditions continue to be adjusted automatically.

It is recommended that you close the lower vent. For details

about this, see page 153.

Push the ”OFF” button to turn the air conditioning off.

2. Use the ”TEMP” or ”PASSENGER TEMP” button to set the desired temperature.

The temperature will be controlled on the driver and passenger sides simultaneously or individually.

”TEMP” button – Changes the temperature on the driver and passenger sides simultaneously or the driver side only.

”PASSENGER TEMP” button – Changes the temperature settings separate from the driver side.

”DUAL” button – Changes the mode of the temperature setting.

The indicator on the ”DUAL” button has two modes:

With the indicator on – For individual temperature setting

With the indicator off – For simultaneous temperature setting

145


20G004–1

146

Driver side setting

Passenger side setting

Mixed setting

SETTING OPERATION – manual control

When one of the manual control buttons is depressed while operating in automatic mode, the mode relevant to the depressed button is set. Other conditions continue to be adjusted automatically.

If manual air flow selection is desired –

21L006-3

The outlets from which air is delivered can be selected manually by pushing the button. The function of each mode is as follows:

1 Panel – Air flows mainly from the instrument panel vents.

2 Bi–level – Air flows from both the floor vents and the instrument panel vents.

3 Floor – Air flows mainly from the floor vents.



4 Floor/Windshield – Air flows mainly from the floor vents and windshield vents.



If quick heating or cooling is desired –

Push the ”TEMP” or ”PASSENGER TEMP” button on either side and hold it until the maximum figure or minimum figure appears on the display.

If manual fan speed control is desired –


If manual switching of air intake is desired –

20G006

20G005

1 Fan speed at low 2 Fan speed at high

The fan speed can be set to your desired speed by pushing the appropriate side of fan speed control button. The higher the fan speed is, the more air is delivered. Pushing the ”OFF” button turns off the fan.

To remove exterior windshield frost, use the high speed setting.

Each time you push the air intake control button, the mode changes in order from the RECIRCULATED AIR mode to

AUTOMATIC mode to OUTSIDE AIR mode, then back to the

RECIRCULATED AIR mode. Each indicator light shows which mode is now selected.

1 RECIRCULATED mode – If quick circulation of cooled air is desired, select this mode.

2 EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode – If the outside air contains harmful substances like exhaust gas (i.e., when the vehicle running just in front of your vehicle accelerates rapidly), the system changes automatically from the

OUTSIDE AIR mode (with indicators 2 and 3 on) to the RECIRCULATED mode (with indicators 1 and 2 on).

3 OUTSIDE AIR mode – The system will take fresh outside air into the vehicle.

147

148


Turning off the air conditioning manually will cancel the

EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode. If you select the “AUTO” mode during fan operating, the air conditioning turns on and the EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode will operate.

For normal use, it is best to keep the air intake control button set to OUTSIDE AIR mode. If recirculated air is used during heating, the windows will fog up more easily.

To change the sensitivity of the sensor switching between the RECIRCULATED and OUTSIDE AIR in the AUTOMATIC mode, push the air intake control button until the ”AUTO” indicator light flashes. The display changes as illustrated below.

The sensitivity of the sensor can be adjusted only while the vehicle has stopped.

20G032

Each time you push the ”TEMP” button, the sensitivity changes from ”+3” down to ”–3”. If you do not operate any button for a few seconds or if you push a button other than the air intake control button and driver side temperature control button, the previous display returns.

If manual on–off of the air conditioning is desired –

Push the ”A/C” button to turn the air conditioning on and push it again to turn the air conditioning off. If you turn off the air conditioning manually, the EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode will be cancelled.

If the outside temperature is lowered down to around 0 C

(32 F), the air conditioning will turn off automatically. At this time, the indicator on the A/C button is off and the EXHAUST

GAS AUTOMATIC indicator light remains on. However, the

EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode does not operate. When the air conditioning turns on as with the raised temperature, the

EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode resumes.

If the system is used for ventilation, heating in dry weather or removing frost or exterior fog on the windshield, turn the air conditioning off once it is no longer required. This will improve fuel economy. The air conditioning can be used for year–round automatic temperature control including cooling and dehumidifying operation.

If the air conditioning compressor does not operate, the indicator of the ”A/C” button will blink. If the indicator of the

”A/C” button blinks even when the ”A/C” button is pushed again, have the compressor checked by your nearest Lexus dealer.

Displaying the outside temperature –

The temperature display ranges from –30 C (–22 F) up to

50 C (122 F).

20G007


(b) Windshield defogging and defrosting

To remove interior fog on the windshield –

Push the ”FRONT WINDSHIELD” button.

To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield –

1. Place the temperature control button at the maximum temperature.

2. Push the ”FRONT WINDSHIELD” button.

3. Push the fan speed control button on the right side to obtain a maximum air flow.

4. Leave the air conditioning on–off button off.

For further information for removing frost and fog, see “Lower

vent” on page 153.

149

150


When the ”FRONT WINDSHIELD” button is pushed while operating in automatic mode, the air conditioning is set to operate and the OUTSIDE AIR mode is set.

If you push the ”FRONT WINDSHIELD” button once again while in the FRONT WINDSHIELD mode, the mode then returns to the last mode used.

CAUTION

Do not use the ”FRONT WINDSHIELD” button during cooled air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up blocking your vision.

(c) Air conditioning filter

21G180a

The air conditioning filter information label is placed in the glove box as shown and indicates that a filter has been installed.

The air conditioning filter prevents dust from entering the vehicle through the air conditioning vent.

The air conditioning filter is behind the glove box.

The air conditioning filter may clog after long use which will reduce the air flow. However, you can inspect the filter easily.

When you inspect and replace the filter, be sure to turn off the fan.


20G008b 21L164a

1. Open the glove box and remove the two covers.

20G009b

2. Take out the filter.

1 Filter 2 Filter case

3. Remove the filter from the filter case.

4. Inspect the filter on the surface.

If it is dirty, it should be replaced. To maintain the air conditioning efficiency, replace the filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, such as inner city or desert areas, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner ’s Manual

Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.)

NOTICE

When setting the filter to the filter case, the UP marks shown on the filter and filter case should be noted and fitted as shown.

151

152


INFORMATION

The filter should be installed properly in position. The use of air conditioning with the filter removed may cause deteriorated dustproof performance and then affect air conditioning performance.

(d) Operating tips

Make sure the air inlet grilles in front of the windshield are not blocked by leaves or other obstructions.

If air flow control is not satisfactory, check the dashboard vents. (See ”Center vents”, ”Side vents”, ”Lower vent” and

”Rear vents”.)

To help cool down the interior after parking in the hot sun, drive for the first few minutes with the windows open. After the excess heat has blown away, close the windows.

When driving on dusty roads, close all windows. If dust thrown up by the vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after closing the windows, it is recommended that the air intake control button be left to the OUTSIDE AIR mode and the fan speed control button be pressed to anywhere except the

”OFF” button.

If following another vehicle on a dusty road, or driving in windy and dusty conditions, it is recommended that the air intake control button be temporarily pressed in to the

RECIRCULATED AIR mode, which will close off the outside passage and prevent outside air and dust from entering the vehicle interior.

Center vents

20G010

The center vents may be opened or closed as shown.

Side vents

20G011

The side vents may be opened or closed as shown.


Lower vent Rear vents

20G012–1 20G013

The lower vent may be opened or closed as shown.

For removing frost or fog, it is recommended that you close the lower vent when you push the “FRONT WINDSHIELD” button or use the”Floor” or the “Floor/Windshield” mode.

The rear vents may be opened or closed as shown.

153

154


SECTION

2

– 2

AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO

Audio

Audio system

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

156

For vehicles equipped with Navigation System, please refer to the separate “Navigation System

Owner’s Manual”.

155

AUDIO

Quick reference for your audio system

AUDIO SYSTEM

21G080d

156

You can adjust the brightness of the display. See “Instrument panel light control” on page 52 for details.

The “DISC” button works only when your Lexus is equipped with an automatic changer.

If a Mark Levinson brand audio system is installed, the “Mark Levinson” logo is shown on the panel.

1 Turning the system on and adjusting the volume

(See page 158 for details.)

2 Stopping and ejecting a cassette tape


3 Function buttons

1 – 6: Station selector buttons


SCAN: Scan tuning


MSG: Message button


4 Display of functions in TAPE mode

: Side change


: DOLBY NR


: Rewinding


: Fast forwarding


RPT: Automatic repeat


SKIP: Automatic skip of blank portions of tape


AUDIO

4 Display of functions in CD mode

: Disc selection


: Reversing


: Fast forwarding


RPT: Automatic repeat


RAND: Random access


SCAN: Track and disc scan selection


5 AUDIO–TUNE knob


6 Radio data system/Traffic announcement/

Program type

(See page 163 and 164 for details.)

7 Cassette tape slot


8 Mode selectors


9 Radio mode: Seek tuning


TAPE mode:

CD mode:

Direct access to a desired program


Direct access to a desired program


157

AUDIO

Using your audio system: some basics

This section describes some of the basic features of the Lexus audio system. Some information may not pertain to your system.

Your audio system works when the ignition key is in the ”ACC” or ”ON” position.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the car audio on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

(a) Turning the system on and off

21G005a

21G081b

Push ”AM”, ”FM”, ”TAPE” or ”DISC” to turn on that mode.

The selected mode turns on directly.

Push these buttons if you want to switch from one mode to another.

If the tape or disc is not set, the cassette player or compact disc player does not turn on.

You can turn off the cassette player by ejecting the cassette tape. If the audio system was previously off, then the entire audio system will be turned off when you eject the cassette tape. If another function was previously playing, it will come on again.

158

Push this knob to turn the audio system on and off. Turn this knob to adjust the volume.

The system turns on in the last mode used.

AUDIO

21G079c 21G007a

In the ”TAPE” or ”CD” mode, the applicable functions are shown in the lowest part of the display. Push the switch just below to turn on each function.

(b) Tone and balance

How good an audio program sounds to you is largely determined by the mix of the treble, mid–range, and bass levels. In fact, different kinds of music and vocal programs usually sound better with different mixes of treble, mid–range, and bass.

A good balance of the left and right stereo channels and of the front and rear sound levels is also important.

Keep in mind that if you are listening to a stereo recording or broadcast, changing the right/left balance will increase the volume of one group of sounds while decreasing the volume of another.

Each time you push the ”AUDIO–TUNE” knob, the display changes as in the following. To adjust the tone and balance or turn on or off the automatic sound levelizer, turn the knob.

BAS: Adjusts low–pitched tones.

MID: Adjusts mid–pitched tones.

TRE: Adjusts high–pitched tones.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between the right and left speakers.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between the front and rear speakers.

ASL: Turns on or off the automatic sound levelizer.

Automatic sound levelizer: When the audio sound becomes difficult to be heard due to road noise, wind noise, etc. during driving, the system adjusts to the optimum volume and tone quality according to the noise level. While the automatic sound levelizer is on, “ASL” appears on the display.

159

160

AUDIO

(c) Your radio antenna

The wire antenna is mounted inside the rear window.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the wire antenna.

Putting a window tint (especially, conductive or metallic type) on the rear window may affect the reception of radio or mobile telephone. For the installation of the window tint, consult with your

Lexus dealer.

(d) Your cassette player

When you insert a cassette, the exposed tape should be to the right.

NOTICE

Do not oil any part of the cassette player, and do not insert anything except a cassette tape into the slot.

(e) Your changer

21G001a

If your Lexus is equipped with a changer, it can play selected discs or continuously play all the discs set in the magazine.

When you set discs into the magazine, make sure they face the correct way. If not, the player will display ”ERROR” and the disc number.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the compact disc player. Do not insert anything other than compact discs into the magazine.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only.

AUDIO

Radio operation

(a) Listening to the radio

21G111a

21G082b

Push these buttons to choose either an AM or FM station.

”AM”, ”FM1”, ”FM2” or “FM TYPE” appear on the display.

Turn this knob to the right to step up the station band or to the left to step down.

Your radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a stereo broadcast is received. ”ST” appears on the display. If the signal becomes weak, the radio reduces the amount of channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating noise. If the signal becomes extremely weak, the radio switches from stereo to mono reception. In this case, ”ST” disappears from the display.

161

162

AUDIO

(b) Presetting a station (c) Selecting a station

Tune in the desired station using one of the following methods.

21G113a

21G115a

1. Tune in the desired station.

2. Push one of the station selector buttons ( 1–6 ) and hold it until a beep is heard. This sets the station to the button and the button number ( 1–6 ) appears on the display.

Each button can store one AM station and two FM stations. To change the preset station to a different one, follow the same procedure.

The preset station memory is cancelled when the power source is interrupted by battery disconnection or a blown fuse.

Preset tuning: Push the button ( 1–6 ) for the station you want.

The button number ( 1–6 ) and station frequency appear on the display.

Manual tuning: Turn the “AUDIO–TUNE” knob. The radio will step up or down to another frequency.

Seek tuning: Push the ”SEEK” button. The radio will begin seeking up or down for a station of the nearest frequency and will stop on reception. Each time you push the button, the stations will be searched automatically one after another.

AUDIO

(d) RDS (Radio Data System)

21G012c

21g127

To scan all the frequencies: Push the ”SCAN” button.

”SCAN” appears on the display. The radio will find the next station up the band, stay there for a few seconds, and then scan again. To select a station, push the ”SCAN” button a second time.

To scan the preset stations: Push the ”SCAN” button until you hear a beep. ”P.SCAN” appears on the display. The radio will tune in the next preset station up the band, stay there for a few seconds, and then move to the next preset station. To select a station, push the ”SCAN” button a second time.

When you push the “RDS” button briefly during FM reception, the RDS turns on. “RDS” and “RDS SEARCH” appear on the display and the radio starts to search RDS stations.

If no RDS stations can be found, “NOTHING” appears and the display returns to the previous mode.

If RDS stations are found, “FOUND **ST” appears on the display (** indicating the number of stations which are found) in the FM TYPE mode and the RDS stations are preset by program type.

To turn off the RDS, push the “RDS” button until you hear a beep.

163

164

AUDIO

TYPE (Program type):

When you push the “TYPE” button while receiving an RDS station, the current program type appears on the display.

Each time you push the “TYPE” button, the program type changes as in the following:

ROCK

EASY LIS (Easy listening)

CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and jazz)

R&B (Rhythm and Blues)

INFORM (Information)

RELIGION

MISC

ALERT (Emergency message)

TRAF (Traffic) function: A station that regularly broadcasts traffic information is automatically located.

When you push the “TRAF” button, “TRAF SEEK” appears on the display and the radio will start seeking any traffic program station.

If no traffic program station is found, “NO TRAF INFO” appears on the display for a few seconds and the display returns to the previous mode.

Radio text message:

21g126

If the radio receives a radio text message during FM reception,

“MSG” and a text message appears on the display. After the text message goes off, “MSG” also goes off.

After the text message goes off from the display, pushing the

“MSG” button during message reception shows the text message again on the display.

The RDS audio system can store three messages consisting of 64 characters in memory. To store a message in memory, push the “MSG” button until you hear a beep.

If three messages are already stored in memory, the oldest message will be overwritten by the new message.

To recall a radio text message, push the “MSG” button. Each time you push the button, the available message will be displayed beginning with the newest one.

If there is no radio text message in memory and when no message is received, “NO MSG STORED” appears on the display. After this, the display returns to the previous mode.

AUDIO

Cassette tape player operation

(a) Playing a cassette tape

21G083b

21G117

When you insert a cassette tape, the exposed tape should face to the right.

The player will automatically start when you insert a cassette tape. At this time, ”TAPE” appears on the display.

If a metal or chrome equivalent cassette tape is put in the cassette player, the player will automatically recognize it and

”METAL” appears on the display.

To stop or eject the cassette tape, push the ”EJECT” button.

Auto–reverse feature: After the cassette player reaches the end of a tape, it automatically reverses and begins to play the other side, regardless of whether the cassette was playing or fast forwarding.

If a cassette is already in the slot, push the ”TAPE” button.

Dolby Noise Reduction* feature: If you are listening to a tape that was recorded with Dolby* Noise Reduction, push the button by the double–D symbol. The display will indicate that the Dolby noise reduction system is on.

The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduction, play your tapes with the Dolby NR on or off according to the mode used for recording the tape.

To play a tape recorded without Dolby NR, push the button again to turn off the Dolby NR.

* Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby

Laboratories Licensing Corporation. ”DOLBY” and the double–D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing

Corporation.

165

AUDIO

(b) Manual program selection (c) Automatic program selection

166

21G119 20G121a

”Program” button: Push the ” ” button to select the other side of a cassette tape. The display indicates which side is currently selected ( indicates top side, indicates bottom side).

”Rewind” button: Push the ”

”REW” appears on the display.

” button to rewind a tape.

To stop rewinding, push the same button or ”TAPE” button.

”Fast forward” button: Push the ” ” button to fast forward a cassette tape. ”FF” appears on the display.

To stop fast forwarding, push the same button or ”TAPE” button.

”RPT” button: The repeat feature automatically replays the current program.

Push the ”RPT” button while the program is playing. When the program ends, it will automatically be rewound and replayed.

Push the button again to turn off the repeat feature.

There must be at least 4 seconds of blank space between programs for the repeat feature to work correctly.

”SKIP” button: The skip feature allows you to fast forward past long stretches of blank tape. This is especially useful at the end of cassettes.

Push the ”SKIP” button. The player will automatically skip any blank portions of 15 seconds or more and play the next program. To cancel it, push the button once again.

21G123

”Automatic program selection” button: The automatic program selection feature allows you to program your cassette player to skip forward or backward to locate the song you want to hear. You can skip up to 9 programs at a time.

Push this button on the upper side to skip forward. ”FF” and the number will appear on the display. Push the button until the number you want to skip appears on the display. After that, the player will automatically skip forward.

When the end of the tape is reached, the player automatically reverses sides and resumes normal play.

AUDIO

Push this button on the lower side to skip backward. Push the button until ”REW” and the number you want to skip appear on the display.

If you set ”REW 1”, the player will rewind to the beginning of the current program.

When counting the number of programs you want to rewind, remember to count the current program as well. For example, if you want to rewind to a song that is two before the song you are listening to, push this button until ”REW

3” appears on the display.

When the beginning of the tape is reached, the player automatically resumes normal play.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blank space between programs for this feature to work correctly.

”RPT”, ”SKIP” or ”Automatic program selection”

features: These features may not work well with some spoken word, live or classical recordings.

167

168

AUDIO

Compact disc player operation

The compact disc player is an optional accessory that your vehicle is pre–wired to accept. Although your audio system has a DISC button, your vehicle may or may not be equipped with a CD player. Please contact your dealer for additional details if you would like to have the optional CD player installed.

(a) Inserting compact discs

21g179

2. Slide and open the cover.

The magazine is automatically ejected.

21G002

1. Pull the lever and open the glove box door.

21g177

3. Pull out the tray while pushing the lock release button.

21g178

4. Put a disc on the tray with its label face up and push the tray back into the magazine.

If the label faces down, the disc cannot be played. In this case,

”ERROR” and the disc number appears on the display.

AUDIO

When the magazine is set completely, the system will be in a

”Load” cycle for approximately 10 seconds while the system searches for discs in the magazine. Upon completion of this cycle, the CD unit will be ready to play. If the ”DISC” button is pushed during the ”Load” cycle, ”LOAD” appears on the display until the system has completed the load cycle, after which the system will begin normal play.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, always keep the glove box door closed while driving.

21G003a

5. Insert the magazine into the player as indicated by the arrow head on the magazine, and close the cover and glove box door.

169

170

AUDIO

(b) Playing a compact disc (c) Selecting a desired disc

21G084b 21G020a

Push the ”DISC” button if the magazine is already loaded in the player.

”CD” appears on the display.

The discs set in the magazine are played continuously, starting with disc number 1. The disc number of the disc currently being played, the track number and the time from the beginning of the program appear on the display.

When play of one disc ends, the first track of the following disc starts. When play of the final disc ends, play of the first disc starts again.

The player will skip any empty disc trays.

Push the ” ” or ” ” button to select the disc number.

Push the button several times until the desired disc number appears on the display. When you release the button, the player will start playing the selected disc from the first track.

(e) Searching for a desired track or disc

AUDIO

(d) Selecting a desired track

21G023a 21G021c

”TRACK” button: Use for direct access to a desired track.

Push either side of the ”TRACK” button several times until the desired track number appears on the display. As you release the button, the player will start playing the selected track from the beginning.

”Fast forward” button.

Push the ” ” button and hold it to fast forward the disc.

When you release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing from that position.

”Reverse” button.

Push the ” ” button and hold it to reverse the disc. When you release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing.

Searching for a desired track:

Push the “SCAN” button briefly. ”SCAN” will appear on the display. The compact disc player will play the next track for 10 seconds, then scan again. To select a track, push the ”SCAN” button a second time. If the player reaches the end of the disc, it will continue scanning at track 1.

After all the tracks or discs in the magazine are scanned in one pass, normal play resumes.

Searching for a desired disc:

Push the “SCAN” button until you hear a beep. With ”D.SCAN” on the display, the program at the beginning of each disc will be played for 10 seconds. To continue listening to the program of your choice, push the button a second time.

After all the discs in the magazine are scanned in one pass, the scan function is cancelled.

171

172

AUDIO

(f) Other compact disc player functions

21G024b

”RPT” button : Use it for automatic repeat of the track or disc you are currently listening to.

Push the button briefly while the track is playing. “RPT” appears on the display. When the track is finished, the player will automatically go back to the beginning of the track and play the track again. To cancel it, push the button once again.

Push the button until you hear a beep. “D.RPT” appears on the display. When the disc is finished, the player will automatically go back to the first track of the disc and play again.

To cancel it, push the button once again.

”RAND” button: Use it for automatic track or disc selection and play by the system.

When the button is pushed briefly, “RAND” appears on the display. The system selects a track in the discs which are set and plays it. To cancel it, push the button once again.

When the button is pushed until you hear a beep, “D.RAND” appears on the display. The system selects a track and discs in the magazine which are set and plays it. To cancel it, push the button once again.

When a track is skipped or the system is inoperative, push the button to reset.

(g) If the player malfunctions

If ”WAIT” appears on the display, audio signals of the disc cannot be read or the system has trouble. Push the ”DISC” button once again.

If the player does not operate, check that the disc surface is not soiled or damaged. If the disc is O.K., the following two causes are possible.

Condensation may have occurred on the internal mechanism of the changer. Open the cover to let the air circulate.

The temperature of the player’s internal mechanism is raised because of high external temperature. Remove the magazine from the player to cool it.

If the player still does not operate, take it to your Lexus dealer.

Steering pad switches (GS430 only)

21g137a

The steering pad switches are installed on the left side of the steering wheel.

“MODE” switch: Push the “MODE” switch to select an audio mode. Each push changes the mode sequentially if the desired mode is ready to use. When you push the switch with the audio system turned off, the audio system turns on.

“VOL” switches: Push “ ” to increase the volume and “ ” to decrease the volume. The volume continues to increase or decrease while the switch is being pressed.

“SET” switch: Push the “SET” switch to change to the preset volume. To preset the volume, adjust the volume and push the switch until you hear a beep.

AUDIO

“ ” or “ ” switch: The function in each mode is shown below.

(a) When the radio mode is selected

Push this switch briefly to select a station that you assigned to a switch on the audio system.

Push this switch and hold it until you hear a beep. The radio will begin seeking up or down for a station and stop on reception.

(b) When the “TAPE” mode is selected

Push this switch briefly for automatic program selection. In automatic program selection, you can skip up to 9 programs

at a time. For details, see page 166 for details.

Push this switch until you hear a beep to fast forward or rewind the tape. To stop fast forwarding or rewinding, push the same side on the switch.

(c) When the “CD” mode is selected

Push this switch briefly to select a desired track.

To select a desired disc, push and hold this switch until you hear a beep.

CAUTION

Operate the steering pad switches with due care while you are driving to avoid accidents.

173

174

AUDIO

Audio system operating hints

NOTICE

To ensure correct audio system operations:

Be careful not to spill beverages over the audio system.

Do not put anything other than a cassette tape or CD magazine into the cassette tape slot or CD changer.

The use of a cellular phone inside or near the vehicle may cause a noise from the speakers of the audio system which you are listening to. However, this does not indicate a malfunction.

Radio reception

Usually, a problem with radio reception does not mean there is a problem with your radio – it is just the normal result of conditions outside the vehicle.

For example, nearby buildings and terrain can interfere with

FM reception. Power lines or telephone wires can interfere with AM signals. And of course, radio signals have a limited range. The farther you are from a station, the weaker its signal will be. In addition, reception conditions change constantly as your vehicle moves.

Here are some common reception problems that probably do not indicate a problem with your radio:

FM

Fading and drifting stations – Generally, the effective range of FM is about 40 km (25 miles). Once outside this range, you may notice fading and drifting, which increase with the distance from the radio transmitter. They are often accompanied by distortion.

Multi–path – FM signals are reflective, making it possible for two signals to reach your antenna at the same time. If this happens, the signals will cancel each other out, causing a momentary flutter or loss of reception.

Static and fluttering – These occur when signals are blocked by buildings, trees, or other large objects. Increasing the bass level may reduce static and fluttering.

Station swapping – If the FM signal you are listening to is interrupted or weakened, and there is another strong station nearby on the FM band, your radio may tune in the second station until the original signal can be picked up again.

AM

Fading – AM broadcasts are reflected by the upper atmosphere – especially at night. These reflected signals can interfere with those received directly from the radio station, causing the radio station to sound alternately strong and weak.

Station interference – When a reflected signal and a signal received directly from a radio station are very nearly the same frequency, they can interfere with each other, making it difficult to hear the broadcast.

Static – AM is easily affected by external sources of electrical noise, such as high tension power lines, lightening, or electrical motors. This results in static.

Caring for your cassette player and tapes

For the best performance for your cassette player and tapes:

Clean the tape head and other parts regularly.

A dirty tape head or tape path can decreases sound quality and tangle your cassette tapes. The easiest way to clean them is by using a cleaning tape. (A wet type is recommended.)

AUDIO

Use high–quality cassettes:

Low–quality cassette tapes can cause many problems, including poor sound, inconsistent playing speed, and constant auto–reversing. They can also get stuck or tangled in the cassette player.

Do not use a cassette if it has been damaged or tangled or if its label is peeling off.

Do not leave a cassette in the player if you are not listening to it, especially if it is hot outside.

Store cassettes in their cases and out of direct sunlight.

Avoid using cassettes with a total playing time longer than

100 minutes (50 minutes per side). The tape used in these cassettes is thin and could get stuck or tangled in the cassette player.

175

176

AUDIO

Caring for your compact disc player and discs

Your compact disc player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7

in.) discs only.

Extremely high temperature can keep your compact disc player from working. On hot days, use air conditioning to cool the vehicle interior before you listen to a disc.

Bumpy roads or other vibrations may make your compact disc player skip.

If moisture gets into your compact disc player, you may not hear any sound even though your compact disc player appears to be working. Eject all discs from the player and wait until the player dries.

CAUTION

Compact disc players use an invisible laser beam which could cause hazardous radiation exposure if directed outside the unit. Be sure to operate the player correctly.

20L037

Use only compact discs marked as shown above. The following products may not be playable on your compact disc player.

Copy–protected CD

CD–R (CD–Recordable)

CD–RW (CD–Re–writable)

CD–ROM

20L480

Special shaped discs

21z017

Transparent/translucent discs

20L481

Low quality discs

Labeled discs

20L482

AUDIO

177

178

AUDIO

NOTICE

Do not use special shaped, transparent/translucent, low quality or labeled discs such as those shown in the illustrations. The use of such discs may damage the player or changer, or it may be impossible to eject the disc.

20L038

Correct Wrong

Handle compact discs carefully, especially when you set them into the player. Hold them on the edge and do not bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints on them, particularly on the shiny side.

Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, or other disc damage could cause the player to skip or to repeat a section of a track. (To see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the light.)

Remove discs from the compact disc player when you are not listening to them. Store them in their plastic cases away from moisture, heat, and direct sunlight.

20L039

To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint–free cloth that has been dampened with water. Wipe in a straight line from the center to the edge of the disc (not in a circle). Do not use a conventional record cleaner or anti–static device.

AUDIO

179

180

AUDIO

SECTION

3

– 1

STARTING AND DRIVING

Starting and driving

Three–way catalytic converters

Engine exhaust caution

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

182

183

Before starting the engine

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

184

Ignition switch with steering lock

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

184

Parking brake

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to start the engine

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

185

186

Automatic transmission

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

187

Electronic throttle control system

Cruise control

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

195

196

Traction control system

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

199

Vehicle stability control system

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

200

Brake system

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

202

Brake pad wear limit indicators

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

206

181


THREE–WAY CATALYTIC

CONVERTERS

31G018e

GS430

31G079

182

GS300

Three–way catalytic converters are emission control devices installed in the exhaust system.

The purpose is to reduce pollutants in the exhaust gas.

CAUTION

Keep people and combustible materials away from the exhaust pipe while the engine is running. The exhaust gas is very hot.

Do not drive, idle or park your vehicle over anything that might burn easily such as grass, leaves, paper or rags.

NOTICE

A large amount of unburned gases flowing into the three–way catalytic converter may cause it to overheat and create a fire hazard. To prevent this and other damage, observe the following precautions:

Use only unleaded gasoline.

Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level; running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, creating an excessive load on the three–way catalytic converter.

Do not allow the engine to run at idle speed for more than 20 minutes.

Avoid racing the engine.

Do not push–start or pull–start your vehicle.

Do not turn off the ignition while the vehicle is moving.

Keep your engine in good running order.

Malfunctions in the engine electrical system, an extremely high three–way catalytic converter temperature.

If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, take your vehicle in for a check–up as soon as possible. Remember, your Lexus dealer knows your vehicle and its three–way catalytic converter system best.

To ensure that the three–way catalytic converter and the entire emission control system operate properly, your vehicle must receive the periodic inspections required by the Lexus Maintenance Schedule. For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the

“Owner’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled

Maintenance”.


ENGINE EXHAUST CAUTION

CAUTION

Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust. It contains carbon monoxide, which is a colorless and odorless gas. It can cause unconsciousness or even death.

Make sure the exhaust system has no holes or loose connections. The system should be checked from time to time. If you hit something, or notice a change in the sound of the exhaust, have the system checked immediately.

Do not run the engine in a garage or enclosed area except for the time needed to drive the vehicle in or out. The exhaust gases cannot escape, making this a particularly dangerous situation.

Do not remain for a long time in a parked vehicle with the engine running. If it is unavoidable, however, do so only in an unconfined area and adjust the heating or cooling system to force outside air into the vehicle.

Keep the trunk lid closed while driving. An open or unsealed trunk lid may cause exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle.

183

184


To allow proper operation of your vehicle’s windshield clear of snow, leaves, or other obstructions.

If you smell exhaust fumes in the vehicle, drive with the windows open and the trunk lid closed. Have the cause immediately located and corrected.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

1. Check the area around the vehicle before entering it.

2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle, head restraint height and steering wheel angle.

3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view mirrors.

4. Lock all doors.

5. Fasten seat belts.

Remember to check that the service reminder indicators function when turning the key to ”ON”, and check the fuel gauge to see that you have sufficient fuel.

IGNITION SWITCH WITH STEERING

LOCK

31G001

”START” – Starter motor on. The key will return to the

”ON” position when released.

For starting tips, see page 186.

”ON” – Engine on and all accessories on.

This is the normal driving position.

NOTICE

Do not leave the key in the ”ON” position if the engine is not running. The battery will discharge and the electronic ignition system could be damaged.

”ACC” – Accessories such as the radio operate, but the engine is off.

If you leave the key in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position and open the driver’s door, a buzzer will remind you to remove the key.*

NOTE: *The volume or interval of beep sound can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.


PARKING BRAKE

31G003c

31G002

”LOCK” – Engine is off and the steering wheel is locked.

The ignition key can be removed only at this position.

To turn the key from ”ACC” to the ”LOCK” position, you must put the transmission selector lever in the ”P” position.

Once you remove the key, the engine immobilizer system is automatically set. See ”Engine immobilizer system” on page

11.

When starting the engine, the key may seem stuck at the

”LOCK” position. To free it, first be sure the key is pushed all the way in, and then rock the steering wheel slightly while turning the key gently.

If, in an emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the key only to ”ACC”.

1 To set: Fully depress the parking brake pedal.

2 To release: Pull the parking brake release lever.

Before leaving your vehicle, firmly apply the parking brake.

CAUTION

Before driving, make sure the parking brake is fully released and that the parking brake reminder light is off.

185

186


HOW TO START THE ENGINE

Before cranking

1. Apply the parking brake firmly.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.

3. Put the selector lever in ”P”. If you need to restart the engine while the vehicle is moving, put the selector lever in ”N”. A starter safety device will prevent the starter from operating if the selector lever is in any drive position.

4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it to the floor until driving off.

Starting the engine

Before starting the engine, be sure to follow the instructions in

”Before cranking”.

Normal starting procedure

The multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system in your engine automatically controls the proper air–fuel mixture for starting. You can start a cold or hot engine as follows:

With your foot off the accelerator pedal, crank the engine by turning the ignition switch to ”START”. Release it when the engine starts.

Engine should be warmed up by driving, not in idle. For warming up drive with smoothly turning engine until engine coolant temperature is within normal range.

If the engine stalls ...

Simply restart it , using the correct procedure given in normal starting.

If the engine will not start

See ”If your vehicle will not start” on page 220.

NOTICE

Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat the starter and wiring systems.

Do not race a cold engine.

If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine checked immediately.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Your automatic transmission has a shift lock system to minimize the possibility of incorrect operation. This means you can only shift out of ”P” position when the brake pedal is depressed with the ignition switch in ”ON” position. ( )

31G029b


The shift position is displayed on the instrument cluster.

GS430:


R: Reverse

N: Neutral


4: Engine braking

When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift from ”D” to ”4”, engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. For the operation to decrease the vehicle speed, see page

198.



187

188


GS300:


R: Reverse

N: Neutral


M: Manual shifting up or downshifting

When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift from ”D” to ”4”, engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. For the operation to decrease the vehicle speed, see page

198.



Correct use of the automatic transmission is explained in the following parts.

(a) Normal driving

(b) Driving in M mode (GS300 only)

(c) Using engine braking

(d) Using the ”3”, ”2” and ”L” positions

(e) Backing up

(f) Parking

(g) Good driving practice

(h) If you cannot shift the selector lever


(a) Normal driving

31G027a

31G030d

1 ”P” (Park) position 2 ”N” (Neutral) position

1. Start the engine as instructed in ”How to start the

engine” on page 186.

The transmission must be in ”P” or ”N”. The engine will not start in any drive position even if the ignition key is turned to

”START”.

1 Power position 2 Normal position

3 Snow position

2. Set the driving pattern selector switch to the ”Normal” position.

Your transmission has a driving pattern selector switch which allows you to select ”Power”, ”Normal” or ”Snow” mode to suit your driving condition. For ordinary driving, Lexus recommends that you use the ”Normal” position to improve fuel economy.

3. For more powerful acceleration and sporty driving, use the ”Power” position.

In the ”Power” position, the ”ECT PWR” light in the instrument cluster is on and the transmission is shifted up at higher vehicle speeds and shifted down more responsively than in the

”Normal” position.

For ”Snow” mode, see ”Electronic Throttle Control

System” on page 195.

189

190


31G031d

1 Brake pedal 2 ”D” (Drive) position

4. With your foot holding down the brake pedal, shift the selector lever to ”D”.

Always use the ”D” position to improve fuel economy and quiet driving. Only in this position, shifting into the overdrive gear is possible. However, while the engine coolant temperature is low, the transmission will not shift into the overdrive gear even

in the ”D” position. (See ”(c) Using engine braking” and ”(g)

Good driving practice” for exceptions.)

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while shifting.

5. Release the parking brake and brake pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal slowly for smooth starting.

In normal cruising, the vehicle will start in first gear and automatically shift up to the most suitable gear. On inclines, declines or winding roads, etc., the vehicle shifts up and down automatically according to the running conditions to obtain the suitable driving power and engine braking.

When the lever is in ”4” position, the automatic transmission system will select the most suitable gear for the running conditions such as hill climbing, hard towing, etc.

If you need to accelerate rapidly while driving, depress the accelerator pedal to the full throttle position. This provides more acceleration by automatically downshifting the transmission to the next lower gear or beyond, depending on the vehicle speed.

If engine braking is needed, such as in descending a long hill,

see ”(c) Using engine braking”.

(b) Driving in M mode (GS300 only)

31G097

1 ”M” position 2 Downshifting on the front,

Upshifting on the rear

When the selector lever is put in the ”M” position, the ”M” indicator is shown on the instrument cluster. Pushing either of the switches on the front or rear of the steering wheel downshifts the transmission from ”D” to ”2” position or upshifts from ”2” to ”D” position.

The current gear position is displayed on the instrument cluster.

Each time you push the switch located on the front of the steering wheel, the transmission downshifts (from ”D”) to ”4”,

”3” and then ”2”.

When you push the switch located on the back of the steering wheel, the transmission upshifts to ”3”, ”4” and then ”D”.

For the precautions on each position, see the description on the previous page.


2 warning tones sound in the following case:

You attempt to downshift the transmission when it is not possible to downshift due to the high vehicle speed.

If the ”M” indicator flashes, there is a problem somewhere in the system. In this case, it should be noted that you cannot downshift or upshift the transmission using the switches on the steering wheel. Consult with your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. The transmission works exactly in the same way as when you put the selector lever in the ”D” position.

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on a slippery surface.

The abrupt change in engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid or spin.

191

192


(c) Using engine braking

31G032c

To use the braking power of the engine, downshift the transmission in the way described below:

1 Shift into the ”4” position. The transmission will downshift to fourth gear and engine braking will be enabled.

When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift from ”D” to ”4”, engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. If

you need to decrease the vehicle speed, see page 198.

2 Shift into the ”3” position. The transmission will downshift to third gear when the vehicle speed is or becomes lower than the speed listed below and stronger engine braking will be enabled.

3 Shift into the ”2” position. The transmission will downshift to second gear when the vehicle speed is or becomes lower than the speed listed below and more powerful engine braking than that of ”3” position will be enabled.

4 Shift into the ”L” position. The transmission will downshift to first gear when the vehicle speed is or becomes lower than the speed listed below and maximum engine braking will be enabled.

”3”

”2”

”L”

GS430 km/h (mph)

153 (95)

100 (62)

39 (24)


128 (80)

86 (53)

16 (10)

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on a slippery surface.

The abrupt change in engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid or spin.


(d) Using the ”3”, ”2” and ”L” positions

The ”3”, ”2” and ”L” positions are used for strong engine braking as described previously.

With the selector lever in ”3”, ”2” or ”L”, you can start the vehicle in motion as with the lever in ”D”.

With the selector lever in ”3” or ”2”, the vehicle will start in first gear and automatically shift to third or second gear.

With the selector lever in ”L”, the transmission is engaged in first gear.

NOTICE

Be careful not to over–rev the engine. Watch the tachometer to keep engine rpm from going into the red zone. The approximate maximum allowable speed for each position is given below for your reference:



”3” 156 (97)

”2” 102 (63)

”L” 66 (41)

130 (81)

85 (53)

55 (34)

Do not continue hill climbing or hard towing for a long time in the ”3”, ”2” or ”L” position. This may cause severe automatic transmission damage from overheating. To prevent such damage, ”4” position should be used in hill climbing or hard towing.

(e) Backing up

31G033c

1 Brake pedal 2 ”R” (Reverse) position

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the selector lever to the ”R” position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the vehicle is moving.

193

194


(f) Parking

31G034c

1 Brake pedal 2 Parking brake pedal

3 ”P” (Park) position

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. Depress the parking brake pedal fully.

3. With the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the selector lever to the ”P” position.

CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selector lever into ”P” under any circumstances while the vehicle is moving. Serious mechanical damage and loss of vehicle control may result.

(g) Good driving practice

If the transmission repeatedly shifts up and down between the fourth and overdrive gears when climbing a gentle slope, shift the selector lever to the ”4” position. Be sure to shift the selector lever to the ”D” position after climbing the slope.

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.

NOTICE

Always use the brake pedal or the parking brake to hold the vehicle on an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold the vehicle using the accelerator pedal, as this can cause the transmission to overheat.

(h) If you cannot shift the selector

If you cannot shift the selector lever even though the brake pedal is depressed, use the shift lock override button. For instructions, see ”If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever” on page 239.


ELECTRONIC THROTTLE

CONTROL SYSTEM

The electronic throttle control system always maintains appropriate engine output in relation to the accelerator opening in all driving conditions.

31G027a

1 Power position 2 Normal position

3 Snow position

The electronic throttle control system has 3 modes:

Normal, Power and Snow modes.

Normal mode: For ordinary driving, Lexus recommends that you use the normal mode to improve fuel economy.

Power mode: For more powerful acceleration and sporty driving.

195

196


In the power mode, the ”ECT PWR” light in the instrument cluster is on and the transmission is shifted up at higher vehicle speeds and shifted down more responsively than in the normal mode.

To return to the normal mode, push the driving pattern selector switch lightly on the ”SNOW” side.

Snow mode: For slippery road surfaces such as in snow. In this mode, the spinning of the rear wheels is controlled appropriately.

When you push the driving pattern selector switch on the

”SNOW” side, the snow mode is turned on and the ”ECT

SNOW” light in the instrument cluster comes on.

To return to the normal mode, push the driving pattern selector switch on the ”SNOW” side again.

When you turn the ignition switch off in the snow mode, the mode automatically changes to the normal mode.

CRUISE CONTROL

The cruise control allows you to cruise the vehicle at a desired speed over 40 km/h (25 mph) with your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Your cruising speed can be maintained although a slight speed change may occur when driving up or down a gradient, within the limits of engine performance. On steeper hills, a great speed change will occur so it is better to drive without the cruise control.

When the cruise control is on, the driving pattern of the automatic transmission is fixed in the normal position, regardless of the position of the selector switch.

CAUTION

To help maintain maximum control of your vehicle, do not use the cruise control when driving in heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or snow–covered) or winding roads.

Avoid vehicle speed increases when driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is too fast in relation to the cruise control set speed, cancel the cruise control then downshift the transmission to use engine braking to slow down.

Turning the system on Setting operation


31G011b 31G012c

To operate the cruise control, push the main switch. This turns the system on. The indicator light in the instrument cluster shows that you can now set your desired cruising speed.

Another push on the switch will turn the system completely off.

When the ignition key is turned off, the main switch is also automatically turned off. To use the cruise control again, push the main switch again to turn it on.

CAUTION

To avoid accidental cruise control engagement, keep the main switch off when not using the cruise control.

Each function is described below.

1 Setting at a desired speed.

The transmission must be in ”D” or ”4” before you set the cruise control speed.

Bring the vehicle to the desired speed, press the control lever downward in the ”SET/COAST” direction and release it. This sets the vehicle at that speed. Now you may take your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you need acceleration – for example, when passing – depress the accelerator pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed the set speed. When you release the accelerator pedal, the vehicle will return to the speed set prior to the acceleration.

197

198


2 Cancelling the preset speed

You can cancel the preset speed by either of the following: a. Pulling the control lever in the ”CANCEL” direction.

b. Depressing the brake pedal.

If the vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will be automatically cancelled.

If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10 mph) below the preset speed, the preset speed will also automatically be cancelled.

If the preset speed automatically cancels out for other than these reasons, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer at the earliest opportunity.

3 Resetting to a faster speed

Press the control lever upward in the ”RES/ACC” direction and hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed is attained.

While the lever is held upward, the vehicle will gradually gain speed.

When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can be increased 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by pressing the control lever upward in the ”RES/ACC” direction quickly within 0.6

seconds.

However, a quicker way to reset is to accelerate the vehicle and then press the control lever downward in the

”SET/COAST” direction.

4 Resetting to a slower speed

Press the control lever downward in the ”SET/COAST” direction and hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed is attained. While the lever is held downward, the vehicle speed will gradually decrease.

When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can be lowered 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by pressing the control lever downward in the ”SET/COAST” direction quickly within

0.6 seconds.

However, a quicker way to reset is to depress the brake pedal and then press the control lever downward in the

”SET/COAST” direction.

Even if you downshift the transmission from the ”D” position to

”4” with the cruise control on, engine braking will not be applied because the cruise control is not cancelled. To decrease the vehicle speed, reset to a slower speed with the cruise control lever or depress the brake pedal. If you use the brake pedal, cruise control is cancelled.

5 Resuming the preset speed

If the preset speed is cancelled by pulling the control lever or by depressing the brake pedal, pushing the lever up in the

”RES/ACC” direction will restore the speed set prior to cancellation. However, once the vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will not be resumed.

Cruise control failure warning

If the ”CRUISE” indicator light in the instrument cluster flashes five times and then goes out when using the cruise control, it means that there is trouble in the cruise control system.

Contact your Lexus dealer.


TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM

The traction control system automatically helps control the spinning of the rear wheels which may occur when accelerating on slippery road surfaces, thus assisting driver to control the driving power of the rear wheels.

31G013

Slip indicator light

When you turn the ignition switch on, this system always turns on. Leave the system on during ordinary driving so that it can operate when needed. When traction control is applied, the slip indicator light blinks.

You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the traction control system is in the self–check mode, and does not indicate malfunction.

When the traction control system is operating, you may feel vibration of your vehicle, caused by operation of the brakes.

This indicates the system is functioning properly.

199

200


When getting the vehicle out of mud or newly fallen snow, etc.

the traction control system will help operate to prevent the wheels from spinning.

To turn off the traction control system, see page 201.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road conditions, full traction of the vehicle and power to the rear wheels cannot be maintained, even though the traction control system is in operation. Do not drive the vehicle under any speed or maneuvering conditions which will cause the vehicle to lose traction. In situations where the road surface is covered with ice or snow, your vehicle should be fitted with snow tires or tire chains. Always drive at an appropriate and cautious pace.

VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL

SYSTEM

The vehicle stability control system helps provide integrated control of the systems such as an anti–lock brake system, traction control, engine control, etc. This system automatically controls the output of the brakes or engine to help prevent the vehicle from skidding when cornering on a slippery road surface or abrupt steering wheel operation occurs.

31G013

Slip indicator light

If the vehicle is going to skid during driving, the slip indicator light flashes and an alarm sounds intermittently.

The vehicle stability control activates when the vehicle speed is about more than 15 km/h (9 mph).

You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the vehicle stability control is in the self–check mode and does not indicate a malfunction.


Vehicle stability control system failure warning

31G015–1

31G021b

You can turn off the vehicle stability control system by pushing the ”VSC OFF” switch. The ”VSC OFF” indicator comes on. At this time, the traction control system also turns off. You cannot turn off either one of them. Pushing the ”VSC OFF” switch a second time turns the system back on and extinguishes the ”VSC OFF” indicator light.

When you turn the ignition switch on, this system always turns on.

These lights warn when there is a problem somewhere in the vehicle stability control system or traction control system.

If the ”VSC” warning light and ”VSC OFF” indicator light come on, have your vehicle checked by Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

The lights will come on when the ignition key is turned to ”ON”, and will go off after about a few seconds.

The lights may stay on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. It is normal if they go out after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the lights.

It is normal if they go out after a few seconds.

If the ”VSC” warning light and ”VSC OFF” indicator light come on, the vehicle stability control system does not activate, however, it is no problem to continue your driving.

201

202


CAUTION

Do not rely excessively on the vehicle stability control system. Even if the vehicle stability control system is operating, you must always drive carefully and attentively to avoid serious injury. Reckless driving will result in an unexpected accident. If the slip indicator light flashes, sounding an alarm, special care should be taken while driving.

Only use tires of specified size. The size, manufacturer, brand and tread pattern for all 4 tires should be the same. If you use the tires other than specified, or different type or size, the vehicle stability control system may not function correctly.

When replacing the tires or wheels, contact your

Lexus dealer.

BRAKE SYSTEM

This brake system has 2 independent hydraulic circuits. If either circuit should fail, the other will still work. However, the pedal will be harder to press, and your stopping distance will increase. Also, the brake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION

Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed immediately.

Brake booster

The brake booster uses brake fluid pressurized by the pump to power–assist the brakes. If the brake booster fails during driving, the brake system warning light comes on and buzzer sounds continuously. In this case, the brakes may not work properly. If they do not work well, depress the brake pedal firmly. If the brake system warning light comes on, immediately stop your vehicle and contact your Lexus dealer.

The brake system warning light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.

It is normal if the light turns off after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the brake system warning light and buzzer. It is normal if the light goes out and the buzzer stops sounding after a few seconds.

You may hear a small sound in the engine compartment after the engine is started or the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly. This is a pump pulsating sound of the brake system, and it is not a malfunction.

CAUTION

Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.

Each push on the pedal uses up your brake fluid pressure reserve.

Even if the power assist is completely lost, the brakes will still work. But you will have to push the pedal hard, much harder than normal. And your braking distance will increase.

Anti–lock brake system

The anti–lock brake system is designed to automatically help prevent lock–up of the wheels during a sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. This assists in providing directional stability and steering performance of the vehicle under these circumstances.

Effective way to press the ABS brake pedal: When the anti–lock brake system function is in action, you may feel the brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise. In this situation, to let the anti–lock brake system work for you, just hold the brake pedal down more firmly. Do not pump the brake in a panic stop. This will result in reduced braking performance.


The anti–lock brake system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately

10 km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle decelerates to a speed below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

Depressing the brake pedal on slippery road surfaces such as on a manhole cover, a steel plate at a construction site, joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day tends to activate the anti–lock brake system.

You may hear a click or motor sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the anti–lock brake system is in the self–check mode, and does not indicate a malfunction.

When the anti–lock brake system is activated, the following conditions may occur. They do not indicate a malfunction of the system:

You may hear the anti–lock brake system operating and feel the brake pedal pulsating and the vibrations of the vehicle body and steering wheel. You may also hear the motor sound in the engine compartment even after the vehicle is stopped.

At the end of the anti–lock brake system activation, the brake pedal may move a little forward.

203

204


CAUTION

Do not overestimate the anti–lock brake system:

Although the anti–lock brake system assists in providing vehicle control, it is still important to drive with all due care and maintain a moderate speed and safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, because there are limits to the vehicle stability and effectiveness of steering wheel operation even with the anti–lock brake system on.

If tire grip performance exceeds its capability, or if hydroplaning occurs during high speed driving in the rain, the anti–lock brake system does not provide vehicle control.

Anti–lock brake system is not designed to shorten the stopping distance: Always drive at a moderate speed and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Compared with vehicles without an anti–lock brake system, your vehicle may require a longer stopping distance in the following cases:

Driving on rough, gravel or snow–covered roads.

Driving with tire chains installed.

Driving over the steps such as the joints on the road.

Driving on roads where the road surface is pitted or has other differences in surface height.

Install all 4 tires of specified size at appropriate pressure: The anti–lock brake system detects vehicle speeds using the speed sensors for respective wheels’ turning speeds. The use of tires other than specified may fail to detect the accurate turning speed resulting in a longer stopping distance.

”ABS” warning light

31G023a

The light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. If the anti–lock brake system and the brake assist system work properly, the light turns off after a few seconds.

Thereafter, if either of the systems malfunctions, the light comes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the anti–lock brake system, the brake assist system, the traction control system and/or the vehicle stability control system do/does not operate, but the brake system still operates conventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the anti–lock brake system does not operate so that the wheels could lock up during a sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces.


If either of the following conditions occur, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the components monitored by the warning light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.

The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, or remains on.

The light comes on while you are driving.

A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains on together with the brake system warning light, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.

In this case, not only the anti–lock brake system will fail but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking.

Either of the following conditions may occur, but do not indicate a malfunction:


Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light. It is normal if it turns off after a few seconds.

205

206


Drum–in–disc type parking brake system

Your vehicle has a drum–in–disc type parking brake system.

This type of brake system needs bedding–down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drums are replaced.

Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding–down.

Brake assist system

When you slam the brakes on, the brake assist system judges as an emergency stop and provides more powerful braking for a driver who cannot hold down the brake pedal firmly.

When you slam the brakes on, more powerful braking will be applied. At this time, you may hear a sound in the engine compartment and feel the vibrations of the brake pedal. This does not indicate a malfunction.

The brake assist system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately 10 km/h

(6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle decelerates to a speed below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

The brake assist system may not work for about 60 seconds after the engine is started.

For an explanation of this system’s warning light, see “ABS” warning light on page 49 or 205.

BRAKE PAD WEAR LIMIT

INDICATORS

31G017

The brake pad wear limit indicators on your disc brakes give a warning noise when the brake pads are worn to the extent that replacement is required.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noise while driving, have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Expensive rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed.

SECTION

3

– 2


Driving tips

Break–in period

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

208

Operation in foreign countries

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

208

Tips for driving in various conditions

..

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Winter driving tips

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

210

Dinghy towing

Trailer towing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

211

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

212

How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

212

Vehicle load limits

Cargo and luggage

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

214

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

215

207

208

DRIVING TIPS

BREAK–IN PERIOD

Drive gently and avoid high speeds.

You need not follow a break–in schedule with your new Lexus.

But following a few simple tips for the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can add to the future economy and long life of your vehicle:

Avoid full throttle acceleration when starting and driving.

Avoid racing the engine.

Try to avoid hard stops during the first 300 km (200 miles).

Do not drive for a long time at any single speed, either fast or slow.

OPERATION IN FOREIGN

COUNTRIES

If you plan to drive your Lexus in another country ...

First, comply with the vehicle registration laws.

Second, confirm the availability of the correct fuel (unleaded and minimum octane rating).

TIPS FOR DRIVING IN VARIOUS

CONDITIONS

Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. This will allow you much better control.

Drive slowly onto curbs and, if possible, at a right angle.

Avoid driving onto high, sharp–edged objects and other road hazards. Failure to do so can lead to severe tire damage such as a tire burst.

Drive slowly when passing over bumps or travelling on a bumpy road. Otherwise, the impact could cause severe damage to the tires and/or wheels.

When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels until they touch the curb so that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the parking brake, and place the transmission in ”P”. If necessary, block the wheels.

Washing your vehicle or driving through deep water may get the brakes wet. To see whether they are wet, check that there is no traffic near you and then press the pedal lightly.

If you do not feel a normal braking force, the brakes are probably wet. To dry them, drive the vehicle cautiously while lightly pressing the brake pedal with the parking brake applied. If they still do not work safely, pull to the side of the road and call a Lexus dealer for assistance.

CAUTION

Before driving off, make sure the parking brake is fully released and that the parking brake reminder light is off.

Do not leave your vehicle unattended while the engine is running.

Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving.

It can cause dangerous overheating, needless wear, and poor fuel economy.

To drive down a long or steep hill, reduce your speed and downshift. Remember, if you ride the brakes excessively, they may overheat and not work properly. See page 192.

Be careful when accelerating, upshifting, downshifting or braking on a slippery surface. The abrupt change in engine speed, such as sudden acceleration or engine braking, could cause the vehicle to skid or spin.

Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 140 km/h (85 mph) unless your vehicle has high–speed capability tires. Driving over 140 km/h

(85 mph) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high–speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.

DRIVING TIPS

Do not continue normal driving when the brakes are wet. If they are wet, your vehicle will require a longer stopping distance, and it may pull to one side when the brakes are applied. Also, the parking brake will not hold the vehicle securely.

209

210

DRIVING TIPS

WINTER DRIVING TIPS

Make sure your coolant is properly protected against freezing.

Only use ”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non–silicate, non–amine, non–nitrite, and non–borate coolant with long–life hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant with long–life hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and organic acids.)

See “Checking the engine coolant level” on page 274 for details of coolant type selection.

For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about –35 C (–31 F).

For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of

55% coolant and 45% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about –42 C (–44 F).

NOTICE

Do not use plain water alone.

Check the condition of the battery and cables.

Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of any battery, so it must be in top shape to provide enough power for winter starting. Page 318 tells you how to visually inspect the battery.

Your Lexus dealer and most service stations will be pleased to check the battery charge level.

Make sure the engine oil viscosity is suitable for the cold weather.

See page 273 for recommended viscosity. Leaving a heavy summer oil in your vehicle during winter months may cause harder starting. If you are not sure about which oil to use, call your Lexus dealer – they will be pleased to help.

Check the electronic ignition system for loose connections or obvious damage.

Keep the door locks from freezing.

Squirt lock de–icer or glycerine into the locks to keep them from freezing.

Use a washer fluid containing an antifreeze solution.

This product is available at your Lexus dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow the manufacturer’s directions for how much to mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or any other substitute because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.

Do not use your parking brake when there is a possibility it could freeze.

When parking, put the transmission into ”P” and block the front wheels. Do not use the parking brake, or snow or water accumulated in and around the parking brake mechanism may freeze the parking brake, making it hard to release.

Keep ice and snow from accumulating under the fenders.

Ice and snow built up under your fenders can make steering difficult. During bad winter driving, stop and check under the fenders occasionally.

Depending on where you are driving, we recommend you carry some emergency equipment.

Some of the things you might put in the vehicle are tire chains, window scraper, bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel, jumper cables, etc.

DINGHY TOWING

DRIVING TIPS

32g006a

Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with four wheels on the ground) behind a motorhome.

NOTICE

Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.

This may cause serious damage to your vehicle.

211

212

DRIVING TIPS

TRAILER TOWING

32G001

Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. It is not designed for trailer towing.

HOW TO SAVE FUEL AND MAKE

YOUR VEHICLE LAST LONGER

Improving fuel economy is easy – just take it easy. It will help make your vehicle last longer, too. Here are some specific tips on how to save money on both fuel and repairs:

Keep your tires inflated at the correct pressure. Check the inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month. Underinflation causes tire wear and wastes fuel.

Do not carry unneeded weight in your vehicle. Excess weight puts a heavier load on the engine, causing greater fuel consumption.

Avoid lengthy warm–up idling. Once the engine is running smoothly, begin driving – but gently. Remember, however, that on cold winter days this may take a little longer.

Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Avoid jackrabbit starts.

Avoid long engine idling. If you have a long wait and you are not in traffic, it is better to turn off the engine and start again later.

Avoid engine over–revving. Use a gear position suitable for the road on which you are traveling.

Avoid continuous speeding up and slowing down.

Stop–and–go driving wastes fuel.

Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a steady pace. Try to time the traffic signals so you only need to stop as little as possible or take advantage of through streets to avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper distance from other vehicles to avoid sudden braking. This will also reduce wear on your brakes.

Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jams whenever possible.

Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal. This causes premature wear, overheating and poor fuel economy.

Maintain a moderate speed on highways. The faster you drive, the greater the fuel consumption. By reducing your speed, you will cut down on fuel consumption.

Keep the front wheels in proper alignment. Avoid hitting the curb and slow down on rough roads. Improper alignment not only causes faster tire wear but also puts an extra load on the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

Keep the bottom of your vehicle free from mud, etc.

This not only lessens weight but also helps prevent corrosion.

Keep your vehicle tuned–up and in top shape. A dirty air cleaner, improper valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oil and grease, brakes not adjusted, etc. all lower engine performance and contribute to poor fuel economy. For longer life of all parts and lower operating costs, keep all maintenance work on schedule, and if you often drive under severe conditions, see that your vehicle receives more frequent maintenance (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner ’s Manual

Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”.)

DRIVING TIPS

CAUTION

Never turn off the engine to coast down hills. Your power steering and brake booster will not function without the engine running. Also, the emission control system operates properly only when the engine is running.

213

214

DRIVING TIPS

VEHICLE LOAD LIMITS

Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity. Follow the load limits shown below.

Total load capacity: 400kg (880lb.)

Total load capacity means combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage. Tongue load is included when trailer towing.

Seating capacity: Total 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)

Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 68 kg

(150 lb.) per person. Depending on the weight of each person, the seating capacity given may exceed the total load capacity.

NOTICE

Even if the number of occupants are within the seating capacity, do not exceed the total load capacity.

Towing capacity

Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.

Cargo capacity

Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the size (weight) and the number of occupants. For details, see “Capacity and distribution” that follows.

CAUTION

Do not apply the load more than each load limit.

That may cause not only damage to the tires, but also deterioration to the steering ability and braking ability, which may cause an accident.

CARGO AND LUGGAGE

Stowage precautions

When stowing cargo and luggage in the vehicle, observe the following:

Put cargo and luggage in the trunk when at all possible. Be sure all items are secured in place.

Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.

For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.

CAUTION

Do not place anything on the package tray behind the rear seatback. Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or an accident.

Do not drive with objects left on top of the instrument panel. They may interfere with the driver’s field of view. Or they may move during sharp vehicle acceleration or turning, and impair the driver’s control of the vehicle. In an accident they may injure the vehicle occupants.

DRIVING TIPS

NOTICE

Do not load the vehicle beyond the vehicle capacity weight specified on the tire and loading information label.

215

216

DRIVING TIPS

Capacity and distribution

Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) – (Total weight of occupants)

Steps for determining correct load limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the

“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. 1400 – 750

(5 x 150) = 650 lbs.

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.

Example on your vehicle

32SA03

1 Cargo capacity 2 Total load capacity

In case that 2 people with the combined weight of 166 kg

(366 lb.) are riding in your vehicle with the total load capacity of 400kg (880 lb.), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows:

400kg – 166 kg = 234kg.

(880lb. – 366 lb. = 514lb.)

From this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of 176 kg (388 lb.) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced as follows:

234kg – 176 kg = 58kg.

(514lb. – 388 lb. = 126lb.)

DRIVING TIPS

As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load equaling the combined weight of occupants who got on later must be reduced. In other words, if the increase in the number of occupants causes the excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you have to reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.

For details about total load capacity, see “Vehicle load

limits” on page 214.

CAUTION

Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. That may cause not only damage to the tire but also deterioration to the steering ability due to unbalance of the vehicle, causing an accident.

217

218

DRIVING TIPS

SECTION

4

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

In case of an emergency

If your engine stalls while driving

If your vehicle will not start

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

220

220

If you cannot increase engine speed

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

225

If your vehicle overheats

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

225

If you have a flat tire

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

226

If your vehicle becomes stuck

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

234

If your vehicle needs to be towed

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

235

If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever

If you lose your keys or lock yourself out

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

239

240

219

220


IF YOUR ENGINE STALLS WHILE

DRIVING

If your engine stalls while driving . . . .

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Try starting the engine again.

If the engine will not start, see ”If your vehicle will not start”.

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not work, so steering and braking will be much harder than usual.

IF YOUR VEHICLE WILL NOT

START

(a) Simple checks

Before making these checks, make sure you have followed the correct starting procedure instructions in ”How to start the engine” on page 186 and that you have sufficient fuel. Since your vehicle is equipped with the engine immobilizer system, also check whether the other keys will start the engine. If they work, your key may be broken. Have the key checked at your

Lexus dealer. If none of your keys work, there may be a malfunction in the immobilizer system. Call your Lexus dealer.

See ”Keys” on page 8.

If the engine is not turning over or is turning over too slowly –

1. Check that the battery terminals are tight and clean.

2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch on the interior light.

3. If the light is out, dim or goes out when the starter is cranked, the battery is discharged. You may try jump starting. See ”(c)

Jump starting” for further instruction.

If the light is O.K., but the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair. Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside

Assistance or Customer Service Assistance. (See

”Foreword”.)

NOTICE

Do not pull– or push–start the vehicle. It may damage the vehicle or cause a collision when the engine starts.

Also the three–way catalytic converter may overheat and become a fire hazard.

If the engine turns over at its normal speed but will not start –

1. The engine may be flooded because of repeated cranking.

See ”(b) Starting a flooded engine” for further instructions.

2. If the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair.

Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer

Service Assistance. (See ”Foreword”.)


(b) Starting a flooded engine

If the engine will not start, your engine may be flooded because of repeated cranking.

If this happens, turn the key to ”START” with the accelerator pedal fully depressed. Continue this operation for 30 seconds and then stop cranking. Then try starting the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If the engine does not start after 30 seconds of cranking, release the key, wait a few minutes and try again.

If the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair.

Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer

Service Assistance. (See ”Foreword”.)

NOTICE

Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat the starter and wiring systems.

221

222


(c) Jump starting

To avoid serious personal injury and damage to your vehicle which might result from battery explosion, acid burns, electrical burns, or damaged electronic components, these instructions must be followed precisely.

If you are unsure about how to follow this procedure, we strongly recommend that you seek help from your Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer Service Assistance.

(See ”Foreword”.).

CAUTION

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which is poisonous and corrosive. Wear protective safety glasses when jump starting, and avoid spilling acid on your skin, clothing, or vehicle.

If you should accidentally get acid on yourself or in your eyes, remove any contaminated clothing and flush the affected area with water immediately. Then get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while en route to the medical office.

The gas normally produced by a battery will explode if a flame or spark is brought near. Use only standardized jumper cables and do not smoke or light a match while jump starting.

NOTICE

The battery used for boosting must be 12 V. Do not jump start unless you are sure that the booster battery is correct.


40G020–1 40G019

GS430 5 Discharged battery 6 Booster battery GS300 5 Discharged battery 6 Booster battery

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE

1. If the booster battery is installed in another vehicle, make sure the vehicles are not touching. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories.

223

224


When boosting, use the battery of matching or higher quality.

Any other battery may be difficult to jump start with.

If jump starting is difficult, charge the battery for several minutes.

2. If required, remove all the vent plugs from the booster battery. Lay a cloth over the open vents on the booster battery.

(This helps reduce the explosion hazard, personal injuries and burns.)

If the booster battery is an extended maintenance interval battery, it is not necessary to remove the vent plugs.

3. If the engine in the vehicle with the booster battery is not running, start it and let it run for about 5 minutes. During jump starting, run the engine at about 2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal lightly depressed.

4. Locate positive (+) and negative (–) terminals of each battery. Connect the jumper cables in the exact order ( 1 2

3 4 ) shown in the illustration.

1 Connect a positive (red) jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery.

2 Connect the clamp at the other end of the positive (red) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery.

3 Connect a negative (black) cable clamp to the negative

(–) terminal of the booster battery.

4 Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative (black) cable to a solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point (such as shown in the illustration) away from the battery. Do not connect it to or near any part that moves when the engine is cranked.

CAUTION

When making the connections, to avoid serious injury, do not lean over the battery or accidentally let the jumper cables or clamps touch anything except the correct battery terminals or the ground.

5. Start your engine in the normal way. After starting, run it at about 2000 rpm for several minutes with the accelerator pedal lightly depressed.

6. Carefully disconnect the cables in the exact reverse order: the negative cable and then the positive cable.

7. Carefully dispose of the battery cover cloths which may now contain sulfuric acid.

8. If removed, replace all the battery vent plugs.

If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent (for example, lights left on), you should have it checked at your

Lexus dealer.

If the first start attempt is not successful...

Check that the clamp on the jumper cables are tight. Recharge the discharged battery with the jumper cables connected for several minutes and restart your engine in the normal way.

If another attempt is not successful, the battery may be depleted. Have it checked at your Lexus dealer.

IF YOU CANNOT INCREASE

ENGINE SPEED

If engine speed does not increase when the accelerator pedal is depressed, there may be a problem somewhere in the electronic throttle control system. Move the vehicle to a safe place by means of creeping and call a Lexus dealer for assistance:

1. Depress the brake pedal and shift to the “D” position.

2. Gradually release the brake pedal, and the vehicle starts to move by creeping. After arriving at a safe place, stop the vehicle and call a Lexus dealer for assistance.

CAUTION

The above method of moving the vehicle is for emergency. Use it only for moving minimum distances to a safe place.

Be especially careful to prevent erroneous pedal operation.


IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

If your engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating, if you experience a loss of power, or if you hear a loud knocking or pinging noise, the engine has probably overheated.

When the engine overheats

Pull safely off the road, stop the vehicle and turn on your emergency flashers. Put the transmission in ”P” and apply the parking brake.

A: If steam is coming from your engine:

Turn off the engine. Leave the hood closed until there is no sign of steam or coolant. Your engine could have been seriously damaged already. Call your Lexus dealer for assistance.

CAUTION

To help avoid personal injury, keep the hood closed until there is no steam. Escaping steam or coolant is sign of very high pressure.

225

226


B: If no steam is coming from your engine:

Leave the engine running and turn off the air conditioning.

Check the following.

Is the cooling fan operating?

Is the coolant in the acceptable range?

Is the engine drive belt O.K.?

CAUTION

When the engine is running, keep hands and clothing away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.

Do not attempt to remove the radiator cap when the engine and radiator are hot. Serious injury could result from scalding hot fluid and steam blown out under pressure.

If the cooling fan is not operating or the coolant is not in the acceptable range, turn off the engine and call your Lexus dealer.

If both conditions are O.K., after the engine coolant temperature has cooled to normal, continue driving your vehicle.

If the engine coolant temperature does not cool down, or your vehicle overheats again, have it checked as soon as possible by your Lexus dealer.

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line.

Move cautiously off the road to a safe place – well away from the traffic. Avoid stopping on the center divider of a highway. Park on a level spot with firm ground.

2. Stop the engine and turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Firmly set the parking brake and put the transmission in ”P”.

4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle on the side away from traffic.

5. Read the following instructions thoroughly.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of personal injury:

Follow jacking instructions.

Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack. Otherwise, personal injury may occur.

Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.


Stop the vehicle on a level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put the transmission in ”P”. Block the wheel diagonally opposite to the one being changed if necessary.

Make sure to set the jack properly in the jack point. Raising the vehicle with jack improperly positioned will damage the vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack and cause personal injury.

Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone.

Use the jack only for lifting your vehicle during wheel changing.

Do not raise the vehicle with someone in the vehicle.

When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.

Raise the vehicle only high enough to remove and change the tire.

NOTICE

Do not continue driving with a deflated tire.

Driving even a short distance can damage a tire and wheel beyond repair.

40G021b

1

5

Tool bag 2 Jack 3 Wrench 4 Jack handle

Spare tire

1. Get the jack, wrench and spare tire.

To prepare yourself for an emergency, you should familiarize yourself with the use of the jack and each tool, and their storage locations.

227

228


40G001 40G002b

1 Joint

2 When removing the jack, turn the joint by hand in the ”contract” direction until the jack is free.

3 When storing, turn the joint by hand in the

”expand” direction until the jack is firmly secured to prevent it from flying forward during a collision or sudden braking.

To remove the spare tire:

1 Remove the luggage tray.

2 Loosen the bolt and remove it.

When storing the spare tire, place it with the inner side of the wheel facing up. Then bolt the tire in place and install the luggage tool box to prevent the tire from flying forward during a collision or sudden braking.


40G003d 40G004a

2. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to keep the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up.

When blocking the wheel, place a wheel block in front of one of the front wheels or behind one of the rear wheels.

3. Loosen all the wheel nuts.

Always loosen the wheel nuts before raising the vehicle.

Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise to loosen them.

To get maximum leverage, fit the wrench to the nut so that the handle is on the right side, as shown above.

Grab the wrench near the end of the handle and pull up on the handle. Be careful that the wrench does not slip off the nut.

Do not remove the nuts yet – just unscrew them about one–half turn.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts. The nuts may loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident.

229


230

40G005–1 40G006a

4. Position the jack at the jack points as shown.

Make sure the jack is positioned on a level and solid surface.

5. After making sure no one is in the vehicle, raise it high enough so that the spare tire can be installed.

Allow for the fact that you need more ground clearance when putting on the spare tire than when removing the flat tire.

To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle into the jack

(it is a loose fit) and turn it clockwise. As the jack touches the vehicle and begins to lift, double–check that it is properly positioned.

CAUTION

Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone.


40G007a 40G008a

6. Remove the wheel nuts and remove the flat tire.

Lift the flat tire straight off and put it aside.

Before putting on the wheel, remove any corrosion on the mounting surfaces with a wire brush or such.

Installation of wheels without good metal–to–metal contact at the mounting surface can cause wheel nuts to loosen and eventually cause a wheel to come off while driving.

231


40G009b 40G010a

232

7. Reinstall all the wheel nuts finger tight.

Align the holes in the wheel with the bolts. Then lift up the wheel and get at least the top bolt started through its hole. Wiggle the tire and press it back over the other bolts.

Reinstall the wheel nuts and tighten them as much as you can by hand. Press the tire back and see if you can tighten them more.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts. Doing so may lead to overtightening the nuts and damaging the bolts. The nuts may loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident. If there is oil or grease on any bolt or nut, clean it.

8. Lower the vehicle completely and tighten the wheel nuts.

Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the vehicle.

Use only the wheel nut wrench to tighten the nuts. Do not use other tools or any additional leverage other than your hands, such as a hammer, pipe or your foot. Make sure the wrench is securely engaged over the nut.

Tighten each nut a little at a time in the order shown.

Repeat the process until all the nuts are tight.

CAUTION

When lowering the vehicle, make sure all portions of your body and all other persons around will not be injured as the vehicle is lowered to the ground.

Have the wheel nuts tightened with torque wrench to 103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf.), as soon as possible after changing wheels.

Otherwise, the nuts may loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident.


9. After changing the wheel, check the air pressure of the replaced tire. Stow all the tools, jack and flat tire securely.

If the inflation pressure of the replaced tire is low, drive slowly to the nearest service station and fill to the correct pressure.

Do not forget to reinstall the tire valve cap as dirt and moisture could get into the valve core and possibly cause air leakage. If the cap is missing, put a new one on as soon as possible.

This is the same procedure for changing or rotating your tires.

CAUTION

When reinstalling a standard tire, take due care in handling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.

Before driving, make sure all the tools, jack and flat tire are securely in place in their storage location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision or sudden braking.

233

234


IF YOUR VEHICLE BECOMES

STUCK

If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc.

then you may attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it forward and backward.

Turn off the traction control system to become unstuck to allow the tires to spin enough to remove the vehicle from the obstruction. (For details, see “Vehicle stability control system” on page 200.)

CAUTION

Do not attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it forward and backward if people or objects are anywhere near the vehicle. During the rocking operation the vehicle may suddenly move forward or backward as it becomes unstuck, causing injury or damage to nearby people or objects.

NOTICE

If you rock your vehicle, observe the following precautions to prevent damage to the transmission and other parts.

Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting the selector lever or before the transmission is completely shifted to forward or reverse gear.

Do not race the engine and avoid spinning the wheels.

If your vehicle remains stuck after rocking the vehicle several times, consider other ways such as towing.

IF YOUR VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE

TOWED

If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by your Lexus dealer or a commercial tow truck service.

In consultation with them, have your vehicle towed using either (a) or (b).

(a) Towing with a wheel lift type truck

(b) Using a flat bed truck

(c) Never tow with a sling type truck

Only when you cannot receive a towing service from a

Lexus dealer or commercial tow truck service, tow your vehicle carefully in accordance with the instructions

given in ”(d) Emergency towing” on page 238.

Proper equipment will help ensure that your vehicle is not damaged while being towed. Commercial operators are generally aware of the state/provincial and local laws pertaining to towing.

Your vehicle can be damaged if it is towed incorrectly.

Although most operators know the correct procedure, it is possible to make a mistake. To avoid damage to your vehicle, make sure the following precautions are observed. If necessary, show this page to the tow truck driver.

TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by the state/provincial and local laws. The wheels and axle on the ground must be in good condition. If they are damaged, use a towing dolly.


(a) Towing with a wheel lift type truck

From front

40G012

Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle with an automatic transmission from the front with rear wheels on the ground, as this may cause serious damage to the transmission.

235

236


From rear

(b) Using a flat bed truck

40G013a 40G014

Place the ignition key in the ”ACC” position.

NOTICE

Do not tow with the key removed or in the ”LOCK” position, as the steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.

When lifting wheels, take care to ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Otherwise, the bumper and/or underbody of the towed vehicle will be damaged during towing.

Tie down points

40E014


40G022

40G015–1

If your Lexus is transported by a flat bed, it should be tied down at locations A and B as shown above.

If you use chains or wires to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded black must be at 45 .

40G023b

Tie down angle

Rear emergency towing eyelets

NOTICE

Do not use the rear emergency towing eyelets.

237


(c) Towing with a sling type truck (d) Emergency towing

40G016–1 40G039e

238

NOTICE

Do not tow with a sling type truck, either from the front or rear. This may cause body damage.

If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by your Lexus dealer or a commercial tow truck service.

If towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed by a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing eyelet. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle from the rear with four wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to the transmission.

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done only on hard–surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the wheels, axles, drive train, steering and brakes must all be in good condition.

CAUTION

Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which would place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelet and towing cable or chain. The eyelet and towing cable or chain may break and cause serious injury or damage.

NOTICE

Use only a cable or chain specifically intended for use in towing vehicles. Securely fasten the cable or chain to the towing eyelet provided.

Before towing, release the parking brake and put the transmission in ”N”. The ignition key must be in ”ACC” (engine off) or ”ON” (engine running).

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not work so steering and braking will be much harder than usual.


IF YOU CANNOT SHIFT

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

SELECTOR LEVER

40G024c

If you cannot shift the selector lever, use the shift lock override button as follows:

1 Turn the ignition key to ”LOCK” or ”ACC”. Make sure the parking brake is applied. Pry up the cover with a flat–bladed screwdriver or equivalent.

239

240


40G025c

2 Insert your finger, the screwdriver or equivalent into the hole to push down the shift lock override button. You can shift the selector lever while pushing the button.

For your safety, keep the brake pedal depressed.

Be sure to have the system checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS OR

LOCK YOURSELF OUT

You can purchase a new key at your Lexus dealer if you can give them the key number and master key.

Even if you lose only one key, contact your Lexus dealer to make a new key. If you lose all your master keys, you cannot make new keys; the whole engine immobilizer system must be replaced.

See the suggestion given in “Keys” on page 8.

You can use the wireless remote control system with the new key. Contact your Lexus dealer for detailed information.

If your keys are locked in the vehicle and you cannot get a duplicate, many Lexus dealers can still open the door for you, using their special tools. If you must break a window to get in, we suggest breaking the smallest side window because it is the least expensive to replace. Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts from the glass.

SECTION

5

MAINTENANCE

Maintenance

Maintenance requirements

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

242

General maintenance

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

243

Does your vehicle need repairing?

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

246

Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner ’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled

Maintenance”.

241

242

MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

Your Lexus vehicle has been designed for fewer maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save both your time and money. However, each regular maintenance as well as day–to–day care is more important than ever before to ensure smooth, trouble–free, safe, and economical driving.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure the specified maintenance, including general maintenance services, is performed. Note that both the new vehicle and emission control system warranties specify that proper maintenance and care must be performed. See “Owner’s Guide”, “Owner’s

Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet” for complete warranty information.

General maintenance

General maintenance items are those day–to–day care practices that are important to your vehicle for proper operation. It is the owner’s responsibility to ensure that the general maintenance items are performed regularly.

These checks or inspections can be done either by yourself or your Lexus dealer.

Scheduled maintenance

The scheduled maintenance items listed in the “Owner’s

Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance” are those required to be serviced at regular intervals.

For details of your maintenance schedule, read the “Owner’s

Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”.

It is recommended that only genuine Lexus parts be used for maintenance or for the repair of the emission control system.

The owner may elect to use non–Lexus supplied parts for replacement purposes without invalidating the emission control system warranty. However, use of replacement parts which are not of equivalent quality may impair the effectiveness of the emission control systems.

You may also elect to have maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and system performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual without invalidating this warranty. See

“Owner’s Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or

“Warranty Booklet” for complete warranty information.

Where to go for service?

Lexus technicians are well–trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and in–dealership training programs.

They are well informed about the operation of all the systems on your vehicle.

You can be confident that your Lexus dealer’s service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements of your vehicle.

Your copy of the repair order is proof that all required maintenance has been performed for warranty coverage. If any problems should arise with your vehicle while under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it. Again, be sure to keep a copy of the repair order for any service performed on your Lexus.

What about do–it–yourself maintenance?

Many of the maintenance items are easy to do yourself, if you have a little mechanical ability and a few basic automotive tools. Simple instructions for how to perform them are presented in Section 6.

If you are a skilled do–it–yourself mechanic, the Lexus service manuals are recommended. Please be aware that do–it–yourself maintenance can affect your warranty coverage. See “Owner ’s Guide”, “Owner ’s Manual

Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet” for the details.

MAINTENANCE

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified. It is recommended that any problem you notice be brought to the attention of your

Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for their advice.

CAUTION

Make these checks only with adequate ventilation if you run the engine.

Engine compartment

Items listed below should be checked from time to time, e.g. each time when refueling.

Washer fluid

Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the tank. See page 325 for additional information.

Engine coolant level

Make sure the coolant level is between the Upper and Lower lines on the see–through reservoir when the engine is cold.

See page 274 for additional information.

Radiator, condenser and hoses

Check that the front of the radiator and condenser are clean and not blocked with leaves, dirt, or insects. See page 276 for additional information.

243

244

MAINTENANCE

Battery

Your Lexus has a maintenance free battery. You do not have to add distilled water. For longer life of the battery, however, see page 318 for additional information.

Brake fluid level

Make sure the brake fluid level is correct. See page 288 for additional information.

Engine oil level

Check the level on the dipstick with the engine turned off and the vehicle parked on a level spot. See page 270 for additional information.

Power steering fluid level

GS430: Check the level through the reservoir. The level should be in the ”HOT” or ”COLD” range depending on the fluid temperature. See page 289 for additional information.

GS300: Check the level on the dipstick. The level should be in the ”HOT” or ”COLD” range depending on the fluid temperature. See page 290 for additional information.

Exhaust system

If you notice any change in the sound of the exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, have the cause located and corrected immediately. (See “Engine exhaust caution” on page 183.)

Vehicle interior

Items listed below should be checked regularly, e.g. while performing periodic services, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Lights

Make sure the headlight, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are working. Check headlight aim.

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers

Check that all service reminder indicators and warning buzzers function properly.

Steering wheel

Check that it has the specified free play. Be alert for changes in steering condition, such as hard steering, excessive free play or strange noise.

Seats

Check that all front seat controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. operate smoothly. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold securely in any latched position.

Seat belts

Check that the seat belt system such as buckles, retractors and anchors operate properly and smoothly. Make sure the belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.

Accelerator pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation and uneven pedal effort or catching.

Brake pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation and the proper clearance and free play. Check the brake booster function.

Brakes

In a safe place, check that the brakes do not pull to one side when applied.

Parking brake

Check that the lever has the proper travel and that, on a safe incline, your vehicle is held securely with only the parking brake applied.

Automatic transmission ”Park” mechanism

On a safe incline, check that your vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in ”P” position and all brakes released.

Vehicle exterior

Items listed below should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.

Wheel nuts

When checking the tires, make sure to check the nuts for looseness. Tighten them if necessary.

MAINTENANCE

Fluid leaks

Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, water or other fluid after the vehicle has been parked for a while. If you smell fuel fumes or notice any leak, have the cause found and corrected immediately.

Doors and engine hood

Check that all doors, including trunk lid, operate smoothly and all latches lock securely. Make sure the engine hood secondary latch secures the hood when the primary latch is released.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire inflation pressure with a gauge every two weeks, or at least once a month and adjust as shown on the tire and loading information label. See page 292 for additional information.

Tire surface

Check the tires carefully for cuts, damage or excessive wear. See page 305 for additional information.

Tire rotation

Rotate the tires according to the maintenance schedule.

(For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner ’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled

Maintenance”.) See page 305 for additional information.

245

246

MAINTENANCE

DOES YOUR VEHICLE NEED

REPAIRING?

Be on the alert for changes in performance and sounds, and visual tip–offs that indicate service is needed. Some important clues are:

Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging

Appreciable loss of power

Strange engine noises

A fluid leak under the vehicle (however, water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)

Change in exhaust sound (This may indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide leak. Drive with the windows open and have the exhaust system checked immediately.)

Flat–looking tires, excessive tire squeal when cornering, uneven tire wear

Vehicle pulls to one side when driving straight on a level road

Strange noises related to suspension movement

Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling brake pedal, pedal almost touches floors, vehicle pulls to one side when braking

Engine coolant temperature continually higher than normal

If you notice any of these clues, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. It probably needs adjustment or repair.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving with the vehicle unchecked. It could result in serious vehicle damage and possibly personal injury.

EMISSION INSPECTION AND

MAINTENANCE (I/M) PROGRAMS

Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On–Board Diagnostics) checks.

The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system. When the OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system, the malfunction indicator lamp comes on. In this case, your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle.

Even if the malfunction indicator lamp does not come on, your vehicle may not pass the I/M test as readiness codes have not been set in the OBD system.

Readiness codes are automatically set during ordinary driving.

However, when the battery is disconnected or run down, the codes are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the codes may not be completely set.

Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had come on recently due to temporary malfunction such as a loose fuel tank cap, your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips, but the error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless about 40 trips or more are taken.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test and the malfunction indicator lamp does not come on, contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re–testing.

MAINTENANCE

247

248

MAINTENANCE

SECTION

6

– 1

SERVICE PROCEDURES AND

SPECIFICATIONS

Introduction

Vehicle identification

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

250

Theft prevention labels

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

251

Engine compartment overview (GS430)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

252

Engine compartment overview (GS300)

Do–it–yourself service precautions

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

253

254

Positioning the jack

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

255

Parts and tools

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

256

249

250

INTRODUCTION

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

61G029a

61G005

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This number is on the left top of the instrument panel and can be seen through the windshield from outside.

This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also on the

Certification Label.

61G007c

GS430 GS300

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.

THEFT PREVENTION LABELS

(U.S.A.ONLY)

61l067a

Your new vehicle carries theft prevention labels which are approximately 47 mm (1.85 in.) by 12 mm (0.47 in.).

The purpose of these labels is to reduce the incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles. The label is designed so that once it is applied to a surface, any attempt to remove it will result in destroying the integrity of the label. Transferring these labels intact from one part to another will be impossible.

NOTICE

You should not attempt to remove the theft prevention labels as it may violate certain state or federal laws.

INTRODUCTION

251

252

INTRODUCTION

ENGINE COMPARTMENT OVERVIEW (GS430)

1 Engine oil filler cap

61G008g

2 Engine oil level dipstick

3 Brake fluid reservoir

4 Fuse box

5 Washer fluid tank

6 Electric cooling fans

7 Condenser

8 Radiator

9 Engine coolant reservoir

10 Power steering fluid reservoir

11 Fuse box

12 Battery

INTRODUCTION

ENGINE COMPARTMENT OVERVIEW (GS300)

1 Engine oil filler cap

61G009e

2 Engine oil level dipstick

3 Brake fluid reservoir

4 Fuse box

5 Washer fluid tank

6 Power steering fluid reservoir

7 Electric cooling fans

8 Condenser

9 Radiator

10

11

12

Engine coolant reservoir

Fuse box

Battery

253

254

INTRODUCTION

DO–IT–YOURSELF SERVICE

PRECAUTIONS

If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure given in this Section.

You should be aware that improper or incomplete servicing may result in operating problems.

Performing do–it–yourself maintenance during the warranty period may affect your warranty coverage. Read the separate

Lexus Warranty statement for details and suggestions.

This Section gives instructions only for those items that are relatively easy for an owner to perform. As explained in

Section 5, there are still a number of items that must be performed by a qualified technician with special tools.

For information on tools and parts for do–it–yourself

maintenance, see ”Parts and tools” on page 256.

Utmost care should be taken when working on your vehicle to prevent accidental injury. Here are a few precautions that you should be especially careful to observe:

CAUTION

When the engine is running, keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt. (Removing rings, watches, and ties is advisable.)

Right after driving, the engine compartment – the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold and power steering fluid reservoir, etc. – will be hot. So be careful not to touch them. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.

Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine compartment.

Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames around fuel or the battery. Their fumes are flammable.

Do not get under your vehicle with just the body jack supporting it. Always use automotive jack stands or other solid supports.

Be sure the ignition is off if you work near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille. With the ignition on, the electric cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or if the coolant temperature is high.

Use eye protection whenever you work on or under your vehicle where you may be exposed to flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc.

Be extremely cautious when working on the battery.

It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

NOTICE

Remember that battery and ignition cables carry high currents or voltages. Be careful of accidentally causing a short circuit.

Add only ”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non–silicate, non–amine, non–nitrite, and non–borate coolant with long–life hybrid organic acid technology to fill the radiator. “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45% deionized water

(for Canada).

If you spill some of the coolant, be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging the parts or paint.

Before closing the engine hood, check to see that you have not forgotten any tools, rags, etc.

Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, or excessive engine wear could result. Also backfiring could cause a fire in the engine compartment.

Do not overfill automatic transmission fluid, or the transmission could be damaged.

Be careful not to scratch the glass surface with the wiper frame.

Front

INTRODUCTION

POSITIONING THE JACK

61g015a

61g016d

Rear

When jacking up your vehicle with the jack, position the jack correctly as shown in the illustrations.

255

256

INTRODUCTION

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of personal injury:

Follow jacking instructions.

Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by the jack. Personal injury may occur.

Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.

Stop the vehicle on a level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put the transmission in “P” position.

Make sure to set the jack properly in the jack point.

Raising the vehicle with jack improperly positioned will damage the vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack and cause personal injury.

Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone; use vehicle support stands.

Do not raise the vehicle with someone in the vehicle

When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the jack.

NOTICE

Make sure to place the jack correctly, or your vehicle may be damaged.

PARTS AND TOOLS

Here is a list of parts and tools you will need to perform do–it–yourself maintenance. Remember all Lexus parts are designed in metric sizes, so your tools must be metric.

Checking the engine oil level

Parts (if level is low):

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent

Oil grade: API grade SL “Energy–Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil. For recommended oil viscosity, see page 273.

Tools:

Rag or paper towel

Funnel (only for adding oil)

Checking the engine coolant level


”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non–silicate, non–amine, non–nitrite, and non–borate coolant with long–life hybrid organic acid technology.

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55% of coolant and 45% deionized water (for Canada).

Tools:

Funnel (only for adding coolant)

Checking brake fluid


FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid

Tools:

Funnel (only for adding fluid)

Checking power steering fluid


Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II or III

Tools:

Rag or paper towel

Funnel (only for adding fluid)

Checking battery condition

Tools:

Warm water

Baking soda

Grease

Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)

Checking and replacing the blade type fuses

Parts (if replacement is necessary):

Fuse with same amperage rating as original

INTRODUCTION

Checking the cartridge type fuses

Parts (if replacement is necessary):

Genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent with same amperage rating as original

Adding washer fluid

Parts:

Water

Washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)

Tools:

Funnel

257

258

INTRODUCTION

SECTION

6

– 2


SPECIFICATIONS

Engine

Specifications (GS430)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

260


. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

263

Fuel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

266

Fuel pump shut off system

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

268

Facts about engine oil consumption

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

268

Used engine oil

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

270

Checking the engine oil level

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

270

Checking the engine coolant level

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

274

Checking the radiator and condenser

Spark plugs

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

276

277

259

260

ENGINE

SPECIFICATIONS (GS430)

– GENERAL

Model

Type

Bore and stroke

Displacement

Valve clearance (engine cold)

Intake

Exhaust

Drive belt tension

– FUEL

Fuel type

Octane rating

3UZ–FE

8 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline

91.0 X 82.5 mm (3.58 X 3.25 in.)

4293 cm 3 (261.9 cu.in.)

0.15 – 0.25 mm (0.006 – 0.010 in.)

0.25 – 0.35 mm (0.010 – 0.014 in.)

Automatic adjustment

Only UNLEADED

91 (Research octane number 96) or higher

– LUBRICATION SYSTEM

Oil capacity

Drain and refill with filter without filter

Oil grade

Recommended oil viscosity

ENGINE

5.2 L (5.5 qt., 4.6 lmp.qt.)

4.9 L (5.2 qt., 4.3 lmp.qt.)

API grade SL “Energy–Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil

5W–30

62sa08

Temperature range anticipated before next oil change

NOTE:

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the above grade and viscosity. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.

261

262

ENGINE

– COOLING SYSTEM

Capacity

Coolant type

9.0 L (9.5 qt., 7.9 lmp.qt.)

”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non–silicate, non–amine, non–nitrite, and non–borate coolant with long–life hybrid organic acid technology (Coolant with long–life hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and organic acids.)


NOTE:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is used in your Lexus vehicle at factory fill. In order to avoid technical problems, only use ”Toyota

Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non–silicate, non–amine, non–nitrite, and non–borate coolant with long–life hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant with long–life hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and organic acids.) Do not use plain water alone. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.

– IGNITION SYSTEM

Spark plug – Make

– Gap

DENSO

NGK

SK20R11

IFR6A11

1.1 mm (0.043 in.)

– ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Battery – Open voltage at 20 C (68 F):

– Charging rates

12.7V

Fully charged

12.3V

Half charged

11.9V

Discharged

[Voltage that is checked 20 minutes after the key is removed with all the lights turned off]

5A max.


– GENERAL

Model

Type

Bore and stroke

Displacement

Valve clearance (engine cold)

Intake

Exhaust

Drive belt tension

– FUEL

Fuel type

Octane rating

2JZ–GE

6 cylinder in line, 4 cycle, gasoline

86.0 X 86.0 mm (3.39 X 3.39 in.)

2997 cm 3 (182.9 cu.in.)

0.15 – 0.25 mm (0.006 – 0.010 in.)

0.25 – 0.35 mm (0.010 – 0.014 in.)

Automatic adjustment

Only UNLEADED

91 (Research octane number 96) or higher

ENGINE

263

264

ENGINE

– LUBRICATION SYSTEM

Oil capacity

Drain and refill with filter without filter

Oil grade

Recommended oil viscosity

5.4 L (5.7 qt., 4.8 lmp.qt.)

5.1 L (5.4 qt., 4.5 lmp.qt.)

API grade SL “Energy–Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil

5W–30

62sa08


NOTE:

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the above grade and viscosity. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.

ENGINE

– COOLING SYSTEM

Capacity

Coolant type

7.7 L (8.1 qt., 6.8 lmp.qt.)

”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non–silicate, non–amine, non–nitrite, and non–borate coolant with long–life hybrid organic acid technology (Coolant with long–life hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and organic acids.)

Spark plug – Make

– Gap


NOTE:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is used in your Lexus vehicle at factory fill. In order to avoid technical problems, only use ”Toyota

Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non–silicate, non–amine, non–nitrite, and non–borate coolant with long–life hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant with long–life hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and organic acids.) Do not use plain water alone. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.

– IGNITION SYSTEM

DENSO SK16R–P11

1.1 mm (0.043 in.)

– ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Battery – Open voltage at 20 C (68 F):

– Charging rates

12.7V

Fully charged

12.3V

Half charged

11.9V

Discharged

[Voltage that is checked 20 minutes after the key is removed with all the lights turned off]

5A max.

265

266

ENGINE

FUEL

Fuel type

Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.

To help prevent gas station mixups, your Lexus has a smaller fuel tank opening. The special nozzle on pumps with unleaded fuel will fit it, but the larger standard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas will not.

At a minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB

3.5–M93 in Canada.

NOTICE

Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of leaded gasoline will cause the three–way catalytic converter to lose its effectiveness and the emission control system to function improperly. Also, this can increase maintenance costs.

Octane rating

Select premium unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher for optimum engine performance. However, if such premium type cannot be obtained, you may temporarily use unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating as low as 87 (Research

Octane Number 91).

Use of unleaded fuel with an octane number or rating lower than stated above will cause persistent heavy knocking. If severe, this will lead to engine damage.

If your engine knocks ...

If you detect heavy knocking even when using the recommended fuel, or if you hear steady knocking while holding a steady speed on level roads, consult your Lexus dealer.

However, occasionally, you may notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

Gasoline containing detergent additives

Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid build–up of engine deposits.

However, all gasoline sold in the U.S. contains detergent additives to keep clean and/or clean intake systems.

Quality gasoline

Automotive manufacturers in the U.S., Europe and Japan have developed a specification for quality fuel named

World–Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is expected to be applied world wide. The WWFC consists of four categories that depend on required emission levels. In the

U.S., category 3 has been adopted. The WWFC improves air quality by providing for better emissions in vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction through better vehicle performance.

Cleaner burning gasoline

Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or

MTBE is available in many areas.

Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions, and improve air quality.

Oxygenates in gasoline

Lexus allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate content is up to 10% ethanol or 15%

MTBE. If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87.

Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.

Gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contain an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese

Tricarbonyl).

Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains

MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected. The Malfunction Indicator

Lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service.

ENGINE

Gasoline quality

In a very few cases, you may experience driveability problems caused by the particular gasoline that you are using. If you continue to have unacceptable driveability, try changing gasoline brands. If this does not rectify your problem, then consult your Lexus dealer.

NOTICE

Do not use gasohol other than stated above. It will cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.

If drivability problems are encountered (poor hot starting, vaporizing, engine knock, etc.), discontinue its use.

Take care not to spill gasohol during refueling.

Gasohol may cause paint damage.

Fuel tank capacity

75 L (19.8 gal., 16.5 lmp.gal.)

267

268

ENGINE

FUEL PUMP SHUT OFF SYSTEM

The fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to the engine to minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an airbag inflates upon collision. To restart the engine after the fuel pump shut off system activates, turn the ignition switch to “ACC” or “LOCK” once and start it.

CAUTION

Inspect the ground under the vehicle before restarting the engine. If you find that liquid has leaked onto the ground, it is the fuel system that has been damaged and it is in need of repair. In this case, do not restart the engine.

FACTS ABOUT ENGINE OIL

CONSUMPTION

Functions of engine oil

Engine oil has the primary function of lubricating and cooling the inside of the engine, and plays a major role in maintaining the engine in proper working order.

Engine oil consumption

It is normal that an engine should consume some engine oil during normal engine operation. The causes of oil consumption in a normal engine are as follows.

Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston rings and cylinders.

A thin film of oil is left on the cylinder wall when a piston moves downwards in the cylinder. High negative pressure generated when the vehicle is decelerating sucks some of this oil into the combustion chamber. This oil as well as some part of the oil film left on the cylinder wall is burned by the high temperature combustion gases during the combustion process.

Oil is also used to lubricate the stems of the intake valves.

Some of this oil is sucked into the combustion chamber together with the intake air and is burned along with the fuel.

High temperature exhaust gases also burn the oil used to lubricate the exhaust valve stems.

The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the viscosity of the oil, the quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.

More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and frequent acceleration and deceleration.

A new engine consumes more oil, since its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls have not become conditioned.

Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000 km (1.1 qt./600 miles,

0.9 lmp·qt./600 miles).

When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately.

For example, if a vehicle is used for repeated short trips and consumes a normal amount of oil, the dipstick may not show any drop in the oil level at all, even after 1000 km (600 miles) or more. This is because the oil is gradually becoming diluted with fuel or moisture, making it appear that the oil level has not changed.

The diluting ingredients evaporate out when the vehicle is then driven at high speeds, as on an expressway, making it appear that oil is excessively consumed after driving at high speeds.

ENGINE

Importance of engine oil level check

One of the most important points in proper vehicle maintenance is to keep the engine oil at the optimum level so that oil function will not be impaired. Therefore, it is essential that the oil level be checked regularly. Lexus recommends that the oil level be checked every time you refuel the vehicle.

NOTICE

Failure to check the oil level regularly could lead to serious engine trouble due to insufficient oil.

For detailed information on oil level check, see ”Checking the

engine oil level” on page 270.

269

270

ENGINE

USED ENGINE OIL

CAUTION

Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact with it. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.

Do not leave used oil within the reach of children.

Dispose of used oil and used oil filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and used oil filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your Lexus dealer or a service station for information concerning recycling or disposal.

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

62G005d

GS430 GS300

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick.

1. To get a correct reading, the vehicle should be on level ground. After turning off the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.

2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag under the end and wipe it clean.

3. Reinsert the dipstick and push it in as far as it will go, or the reading will not be correct.

62g031

GS430 1 Add oil 2 O.K. 3 Too full

62g032

GS300 1 Add oil 2 O.K. 3 Too full

4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil level while holding a rag under the end. If it is between the full line ( 5 ) and the low line ( 4 ), it is O.K.

ENGINE

NOTICE

Be careful not to drop engine oil on the vehicle components.

271

272

ENGINE

62G007e

GS430 GS300

If the oil level is below or only slightly above the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine.

Remove the oil filler cap and add engine oil a little at a time, checking the dipstick. We recommend that you use a funnel when adding oil. The approximate quantity of oil needed to raise the level between low and full on the dipstick is indicated below for reference.

When the level reaches within the correct range, return the filler cap and turn the cap clockwise until you hear a click.

Oil quantity. L (qt., lmp. qt.) 1.8 (1.9, 1.6)

NOTICE

Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.

Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.

Check the oil level on the dipstick once again after adding the oil.

ENGINE

Engine oil selection

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use

Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.

Oil grade: API grade SL “Energy–Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil.

Recommended viscosity: 5W–30

Oil identification marks

62L038

62sa08


SAE 5W–30 is the best choice for good fuel economy, and good starting in cold weather.

If SAE is not available, SAE10W–30 may be used.

However, it should be replaced with 5W–30 at the next oil change.

API Service Symbol ILSAC Certification Mark

Either or both API registered marks are added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use.

The API Service Symbol is located anywhere on the outside of the container.

The top portion of the label shows the oil quality by API

(American Petroleum Institute) designation such as SL.

The center portion of the label shows the SAE viscosity grade such as SAE 5W–30. ”Energy–Conserving”, shown in the lower portion, indicates that the oil has fuel–saving capabilities.

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and

Approval Committee) Certification Mark is displayed on the front of the container.

273

274

ENGINE

To ensure excellent performance for your engine, “Toyota

Genuine Motor Oil” is available, which has been specifically tested and approved for all Lexus engines.

Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details about

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil”.

CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL

62G028

GS430 1 Reservoir cap 2 Upper line 3 Lower line

62G004–1

GS300 1 Reservoir cap 2 Upper line 3 Lower line

Look at the see–through coolant reservoir when the engine is cold. The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the”FULL” and ”LOW” lines on the reservoir. If the level is low, add the coolant. (For the coolant type, see

“Coolant type selection” described below.)

The coolant level in the reservoir will vary with engine temperature. However, if the level is on or below the ”LOW” line, add coolant. Bring the level up to the ”FULL” line.

If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing, there may be a leak in the system. Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant filler cap, radiator cap and drain cock and water pump.

If you can find no leak, have your Lexus dealer test the cap pressure and check for leaks in the cooling system.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot.

ENGINE

Coolant type selection

Use of improper coolants may damage your engine cooling system.

Only use ”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non–silicate, non–amine, non–nitrite, and non–borate coolant with long–life hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant with long–life hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and organic acids.)

For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about –35 C (–31 F).

For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of

55% coolant and 45% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about –42 C (–44 F).

NOTICE

Do not use plain water alone.

275

276

ENGINE

Lexus recommends “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant,” which has been tested to ensure that it will not cause corrosion nor result in malfunction of your engine coolant system with proper usage. “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is formulated with long–life hybrid organic acid technology and has been specifically designed to avoid engine cooling system malfunction on Lexus vehicles.

Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.

CHECKING THE RADIATOR AND

CONDENSER

If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself , be careful not to touch the radiator or condenser when the engine is hot.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the radiator and condenser, do not perform the work by yourself.

ENGINE

SPARK PLUGS

62g021a

62R031c

GS430

Your engine is fitted with iridium–tipped spark plugs.

NOTICE

Use only iridium–tipped spark plugs and do not adjust gaps for your engine performance and smooth drivability.

GS300

Your engine is fitted with the designated iridium–tipped spark plugs.

NOTICE

Use the designated iridium–tipped spark plugs and do not adjust gaps for your engine performance and smooth drivability.

277

278

ENGINE

SECTION

6

– 3


SPECIFICATIONS

Chassis


. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

280


. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

284

Checking brake fluid

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

288

Checking power steering fluid (GS430)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

289

Checking power steering fluid (GS300)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

290

Checking tire inflation pressure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

292

Tire information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Types of tires

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

304

Rotating tires

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

305

Checking and replacing tires

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

305

Installing snow tires and chains

Replacing wheels

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

308

310

Aluminum wheel precautions

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

311

Suspension and chassis

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

311

279

280

CHASSIS


– DIFFERENTIAL

Oil capacity

Oil type and viscosity

Vehicles without synthetic oil information label

Vehicles with synthetic oil information label*

NOTE:

*Vehicles with synthetic oil information label only:

The following label is affixed on the right side of the differential carrier. Use the type and viscosity shown on the label when the differential oil is replaced.

Synthetic oil information label

1.35 L (1.42 qt., 1.19 lmp.qt.)

Hypoid gear oil API GL–5

Above –18 C (0 F): SAE 90

Below –18 C (0 F): SAE 80W or SAE 80W–90

Toyota Genuine Differential Synthetic gear oil

API GL–5 SAE 75W–90 or its equivalent

NOTICE

Vehicles with synthetic oil information label only:

Use of differential oil other than “Toyota Genuine equivalent may damage the differential gear of your vehicle and diminish fuel efficiency. For the reasons mentioned above, Lexus recommends use of “Toyota Genuine

Differential Synthetic gear oil API GL–5 SAE 75W–90”.

Another differential oil of matching quality can also be used, (but note that despite the similarity in nomenclature between “Toyota Genuine Differential Synthetic gear oil

API GL–5 SAE 75W–90” and oils that meet SAE 75W–90 specifications, compliance with the SAE specification does not guarantee that an oil has all characteristic required to avoid the problem described above.) If you are unable to locate an equivalent to “Toyota Genuine

Differential Synthetic gear oil API GL–5 SAE 75W–90”, contact your Lexus dealer for further details or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

CHASSIS

– AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Fluid capacity

Drain and refill

Fluid type

1.8 L (1.9 qt., 1.6 lmp.qt.)

Toyota Genuine ATF Type T – IV*

*Change automatic transmission fluid only as necessary.

Generally, it is necessary to change automatic transmission fluid only if your vehicle is driven under one of the Special

Operating Conditions listed in your “Owner ’s Manual

Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”. When changing the automatic transmission fluid, use only “Toyota Genuine ATF

Type T–IV” ( ATF JWS3309 or NWS6500) to aid in assuring optimum transmission performance.

– BRAKES

NOTICE

Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota

Genuine ATF Type T–IV” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle.

Pedal clearance * 1

Pedal free play

Brake pad wear limit

Parking brake lining wear limit

Parking brake adjustment * 2

Fluid type

93 mm (3.7 in.) Min.

0.2 – 2 mm (0.008 – 0.08 in.)

1.0 mm (0.04 in.)

1.0 mm (0.04 in.)

7 – 9 clicks

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3

* 1 Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with the force of 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf.) with the engine running

* 2 Parking brake adjustment when depressed with the force of 294 N (30 kgf, 66.1 lbf.)

281

282

CHASSIS

– STEERING

Free play

Power steering fluid

Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON

II

or

III

– TIRES AND WHEELS (Type A)

Tire size

Tire inflation pressure

Recommended cold tire inflation pressure

225/55R16 94V

Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

Front 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm 2 or bar, 32 psi)

Rear 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm 2 or bar, 32 psi)

For sustained high speeds above 160 km/h (100 mph), in countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 80 kPa

(0.8 kgf/cm 2 or bar, 12 psi) to the front tires and rear tires, but never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure molded on the tire sidewall.

16 x 7 1/2 JJ

103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf.)

NOTE:

For complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pressure”

through “Aluminum wheel precautions” on page 292 through 311.

CHASSIS

– TIRES AND WHEELS (Type B)

Tire size



235/45ZR17

Wheel size

Wheel nut torque





17 x 8 JJ

103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf.)

NOTE:



283

284

CHASSIS


– DIFFERENTIAL

Oil capacity

Oil type and viscosity

Vehicles without synthetic oil information label

Vehicles with synthetic oil information label*

NOTE:

*Vehicles with synthetic oil information label only:

The following label is affixed on the right side of the differential carrier. Use the type and viscosity shown on the label when the differential oil is replaced.

Synthetic oil information label

1.35 L (1.42 qt., 1.19 lmp.qt.)

Hypoid gear oil API GL–5

Above –18 C (0 F): SAE 90

Below –18 C (0 F): SAE 80W or SAE 80W–90

Toyota Genuine Differential Synthetic gear oil

API GL–5 SAE 75W–90 or its equivalent

NOTICE

Vehicles with synthetic oil information label only :

Use of differential oil other than “Toyota Genuine equivalent may damage the differential gear of your vehicle and diminish fuel efficiency. For the reasons mentioned above, Lexus recommends use of “Toyota Genuine

Differential Synthetic gear oil API GL–5 SAE 75W–90”.

Another differential oil of matching quality can also be used, (but note that despite the similarity in nomenclature between “Toyota Genuine Differential Synthetic gear oil

API GL–5 SAE 75W–90” and oils that meet SAE 75W–90 specifications, compliance with the SAE specification does not guarantee that an oil has all characteristic required to avoid the problem described above.) If you are unable to locate an equivalent to “Toyota Genuine

Differential Synthetic gear oil API GL–5 SAE 75W–90”, contact your Lexus dealer for further details or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

CHASSIS

– AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Fluid capacity

Drain and refill

Fluid type

2.0 L (2.1 qt., 1.8 lmp.qt.)

Toyota Genuine ATF Type T – IV*

*Change automatic transmission fluid only as necessary.

Generally, it is necessary to change automatic transmission fluid only if your vehicle is driven under one of the Special

Operating Conditions listed in your “Owner ’s Manual

Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”. When changing the automatic transmission fluid, use only “Toyota Genuine ATF

Type T–IV” ( ATF JWS3309 or NWS6500) to aid in assuring optimum transmission performance.

– BRAKES

NOTICE

Using automatic transmission fluid other than Toyota

Genuine ATF Type T–IV may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle.

Pedal clearance * 1

Pedal free play

Brake pad wear limit

Parking brake lining wear limit

Parking brake adjustment * 2

Fluid type

93 mm (3.7 in.) Min.

0.2 – 2 mm (0.008 – 0.08 in.)

1.0 mm (0.04 in.)

1.0 mm (0.04 in.)

7 – 9 clicks

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3

* 1 Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with the force of 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf.) with the engine running

* 2 Parking brake adjustment when depressed with the force of 294 N (30 kgf, 66.1 lbf.)

285

286

CHASSIS

– STEERING

Free play

Power steering fluid

Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II or III

– TIRES AND WHEELS (Type A)

Tire size P215/60R16 94V


Recommended cold tire inflation pressure Front 210 kPa (2.1 kgf/cm 2 or bar, 30 psi)




Wheel size 16 x 7

1/2

JJ

Wheel nut torque 103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf.)

NOTE:



CHASSIS

– TIRES AND WHEELS (Type B)

Tire size



225/55R16 94V

Wheel size

Wheel nut torque





16 x 7 1/2 JJ

103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf.)

NOTE:



287

CHASSIS

CHECKING BRAKE FLUID

63G002a

288

To check the fluid level, simply look at the see–through reservoir. The level should be between the ”MAX” and

”MIN” lines on the tank.

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious mechanical problem.

If the level is low, add FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid to the brake reservoir.

Refilling brake fluid:

1. Turn the ignition switch off.

2. Depress the brake pedal more than 40 times.

3. Remove the reservoir cap by hand. Add brake fluid up to the

”MAX” line.

If you do not follow the procedure above, the reservoir may overflow.

Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once opened, brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air, and excess moisture can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency.

CAUTION

Take care when filling the reservoir because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes. If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately. If you still feel uncomfortable with your hands or eyes, go to the doctor.

NOTICE

If you spill some of the fluid, be sure to wipe it off to prevent it from damaging the parts or paintwork.

CHASSIS

CHECKING POWER STEERING

FLUID (GS430)

63G006–1

63G003–1

Check the fluid level through the reservoir. If necessary, add automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II or III.

If the vehicle has been driven around 80 km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a little more in frigid temperatures), the fluid is hot

(60 C – 80 C or 140 F – 175 F). You may also check the level when the fluid is cold (about room temperature, 10 C – 30 C or 50 F – 85 F) if the engine has not been run for about five hours.

1 If hot O.K. 2 If hot add 3 If cold O.K.

4 If cold add

Clean all dirt off the reservoir and look at the fluid level. If the fluid is cold, the level should be in the ”COLD” range. Similarly, if it is hot, the fluid level should be in the ”HOT” range. If the level is at the low side of the appropriate range, add automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II or III to bring the level within the range.

To remove the reservoir cap, turn it counterclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it, turn it clockwise. After replacing the reservoir cap, visually check the steering box case, vane pump and hose connections for leaks or damage.

CAUTION

The reservoir may be hot so be careful not to burn yourself.

289

290

CHASSIS

NOTICE

Avoid overfilling, or the power steering could be damaged.

CHECKING POWER STEERING

FLUID (GS300)

63G004–1

Check the fluid level on the dipstick. If necessary, add automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II or III.

If the vehicle has been driven around 80 km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a little more in frigid temperatures), the fluid is hot

(60 C – 80 C or 140 F – 175 F). You may also check the level when the fluid is cold (about room temperature, 10 C – 30 C or 50 F – 85 F) if the engine has not been run for about five hours.

63L003–1

1 If cold O.K. 2 If hot O.K. 3 Add fluid

1. Clean all dirt off the reservoir.

2. Remove the reservoir cap by turning it counterclockwise and wipe the dipstick clean.

3. Reinstall the reservoir cap.

4. Remove the reservoir cap again and look at the fluid level.

If the fluid is cold, the level should be in the ”COLD” range on the dipstick. Similarly, if it is hot, the fluid level should be in the

”HOT” range. If the level is at the low side of either range, add automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II or III to bring the level within the range.

5. After replacing the reservoir cap, visually check the steering box case, vane pump and hose connections for leaks or damage.

CHASSIS

CAUTION

The reservoir may be hot so be careful not to burn yourself.

NOTICE

Avoid overfilling, or the power steering could be damaged.

291

292

CHASSIS

CHECKING TIRE INFLATION

PRESSURE

63g018a

The recommended cold tire inflation pressure, tire size and the combined weight of occupants and cargo (vehicle capacity weight) are described on the tire and loading information label.

You should check the tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month. And do not forget the spare! The inflation pressure for the spare tire should be

the same with that for the standard tire. (See page 282

or 286.)

The following instructions for checking tire inflation pressure should be observed:

The pressure should be checked only when the

tires are cold. If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for more than

1.5 km or 1 mile since, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.

Always use a tire pressure gauge. The appearance of the tire can be misleading. Besides, tire inflation pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.

Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after

driving. It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.

Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.

Passengers and luggage weight should be located so that the vehicle is balanced.

Inspection and adjustment procedure

63g013

1

2

Tire valve

Tire pressure gauge

1. Remove the tire valve cap.

2. Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge to the tire valve.

3. Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.

4. In case the tire inflation pressure is not within the prescribed range, insert the compressed air from the valve. In case of applying too much air, press the center of the valve and release the air to adjust.

5. After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.

CHASSIS

6. Install the tire valve cap.

If a gauge and air pump are not available, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.

CAUTION

Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps. Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If the caps have been lost, have new ones put on as soon as possible.

Incorrect tire inflation pressure may waste fuel, reduce the comfort of driving, reduce tire life and make your vehicle less safe to drive.

If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your

Lexus dealer.

293

294

CHASSIS

CAUTION

Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and cause an accident resulting in death or serious injuries.

Low tire pressure (underinflation):

Excessive wear

Uneven wear

Poor handling

Possibility of blowouts from an overheated tire

Poor sealing of the tire bead

Wheel deformation and/or tire separation

A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards

High tire pressure (overinflation):

Poor handling

Excessive wear

Uneven wear

A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards

Tire symbols

TIRE INFORMATION

63g017

The illustration indicates typical tire symbols.

CHASSIS

295

296

CHASSIS

1

2

3

4

5

6

Tire size: For details, see “Tire size” on page

297.

DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN): For details, see “DOT and Tire Identification Number

(TIN)” on page 297.

Location of tread wear indicators: For details,

see “Checking and replacing tires” on page 305.

Tire ply composition and materials : Plies mean a layer of rubber–coated parallel cords.

Cords mean the strands forming the plies in the tire.

Radial tires or bias–ply tires : A radial tire has

“RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked with

“RADIAL” is a bias–ply tire.

“TUBELESS” or “TUBE TYPE”: A tubeless tire does not have a tube inside the tire and air is directly filled in the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.

7

8

9

10

Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation

pressure: For details, see “Checking and

replacing tires” on page 305.

Maximum cold tire inflation pressure: This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated. For recommended cold tire inflation

pressure, see “Specifications” on page 286.

Uniform tire quality grading For details, see

“Uniform tire quality grading” on page 299.

Summer tire or all season tire: An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. The tire not marked with “M+S” is a summer tire. For details,

see “Types of tires” on page 304.

DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) Tire size

63SA11a

The illustration indicates typical DOT and Tire

Identification Number (TIN)

1

2

“DOT” symbol

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

3

4

5

6

7

Tire manufacturer’s identification mark

Tire size code

Manufacturer’s optional tire type code

Manufacturing week

Manufacturing year

The “DOT” symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

Type A

63g015a

CHASSIS

297

298

CHASSIS

63g016 63g014b

Type B

The illustrations indicate typical tire sizes.

1

2

3

4

Tire use (P=Passenger car, T=Temporary use)

Section width (in millimeters)

Aspect ratio (tire height to section width)

Speed category (alphabet with one letter)

5 Tire construction code

(R=Radial, D=Diagonal)

6

7

8

Wheel diameter (in inches)

Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)

Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter)

1

2

3

Section width

Tire height

Wheel diameter

Name of each section of tire

63sa14

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

Bead

Sidewall

Shoulder

Tread

Belt

Inner liner

Reinforcing rubber

Carcass

Rim lines

Bead wires

Chafer

CHASSIS

Uniform tire quality grading

This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway

Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.

Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.

DOT quality grades – All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature

A

Treadwear – The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 – 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

299

300

CHASSIS

Traction AA, A, B, C – The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.

Temperature A, B, C – The temperature grades are A

(the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade

C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

CHASSIS

Glossary of tire terminology

Tire related term

Cold tire inflation pressure

Meaning tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mile under that condition

Maximum inflation pressure

Recommended inflation pressure the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and it is shown on the sidewall of the tire cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Accessory weight

Curb weight

Maximum loaded vehicle weight the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory–installed equipment (whether installed or not) the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine the sum of —

(a) curb weight;

(b) accessory weight;

(c) vehicle capacity weight; and

(d) production options weight

301

302

CHASSIS

Tire related term

Normal occupant weight

Production options weight

Vehicle capacity weight

(Total load capacity)

Meaning

68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of

Table 1 that follows the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over

2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity

Intended outboard sidewall

Occupant distribution

Rim

Rim diameter

(Wheel diameter)

(a) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(b) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1 that follows a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated nominal diameter of the bead seat

CHASSIS

Tire related term

Rim size designation

Rim type designation

Rim width

Vehicle maximum load on the tire

Vehicle normal load on the tire

Weather side

Meaning rim diameter and width the industry of manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code nominal distance between rim flanges the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight

(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Table 1 – Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity,

Number of occupants

Vehicle normal load,

Number of occupants

Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle

2 through 4

5 through 10

2

3

2 in front

2 in front, 1 in second seat

303

304

CHASSIS

TYPES OF TIRES

Determine what kind of tires your vehicle is originally equipped with.

1.

Summer tires

Summer tires are high–speed capability tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions.

Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow–covered or icy roads.

For driving on snow–covered or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.

2.

All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use all year round.

All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.

CAUTION

Do not mix summer and all season tires on your vehicle as this can cause dangerous handling characteristics, resulting in loss of control.

Do not use tires other than the manufacturer’s designated tires, and never mix tires or wheels of the sizes different from the originals as this could result in loss of control and could cause death or serious injury.

ROTATING TIRES

63L020a

CHASSIS

Before storing radial, snow or studded tires, mark the direction of rotation and be sure to install them in the same direction when using them again. Tires should be stored in a cool dry place.

CHECKING AND REPLACING TIRES

When to replace your tires

To equalize tire wear and help extend tire life, Lexus recommends that you rotate your tires according to the maintenance schedule. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the

“Owner ’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled

Maintenance”.) However, the most appropriate timing for tire rotation may vary according to your driving habits and road surface conditions.

The wheel assemblies must be rotated as illustrated above.

When rotating tires, check for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tire inflation pressure, improper wheel alignment, out–of–balance wheels, or severe braking.

63G001d

1

3

New tread 2 Tread wear indicator

Worn tread

Replace the tires when the tread wear indicators show. The location of tread wear indicators is shown by the ”TWI” or ”

∆

” marks, etc., molded on the sidewall of each tire.

305

306

CHASSIS

The tires on your Lexus have built–in tread wear indicators to help you know when the tires need replacement. When the tread depth wears to 1.6 mm

(0.06 in.) or less, the indicators will appear. If you can see the indicators in two or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced.

Vehicles equipped with 235/45ZR17 tires: Your

Lexus has been fitted with specially developed tires which provide exceptional dynamic performance under general road conditions. However your riding comfort may worsen a little and road noise may increase during driving. You may also notice that your tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be reduced on the snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to have snow tires or tire chains on the snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully with the speed appropriate for road conditions.

NOTICE

Low profile tire like 235/45ZR17 may have greater damage than usual tires to its tire wheel when receiving impact from the road surface.

Therefore, pay attention to the following.

Be sure to use with proper tire inflation pressure.

If the tire inflation pressure is low, the tire may have greater damage. For detailed information

about tire inflation pressure, see page 282.

Avoid driving onto high, sharp–edged objects and other road hazards. Failure to do so can lead to severe tire damage.

The effectiveness of snow tires is lost if the tread wears down below 4 mm (0.16 in.).

If you have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, or bulges indicating internal damage, the tire should be replaced.

If a tire often goes flat or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage, it should be replaced. If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.

If air loss occurs while driving, do not continue driving.

Driving even a short distance can damage a tire beyond repair.

Any tires which are over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if damage is not obvious.

Tires deteriorate with age even if they have never or seldom been used.

This applies also to the spare tire and tires stored for future use.

CHASSIS

Tire selection

When replacing a tire, use a tire of the same size and construction, and the same or greater maximum load as the originally installed tires.

Using any other size or type of tire may seriously affect handling, ride, speedometer/odometer calibration, ground clearance, and clearance between the body and tires or snow chains.

Check that the maximum load of the replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings

(GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater. As for the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire, and as for the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR), see the

Certification Label. For details about the Certification

Label and sidewall of the tire, see pages 250 and 295.

307

308

CHASSIS

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

Do not mix radial, bias belted, or bias–ply tires on your vehicle, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.

Do not use tires other than the manufacturer’s recommended size, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.

INSTALLING SNOW TIRES AND

CHAINS

When to use snow tires or chains

Snow tires or chains are recommended when driving on snow or ice.

On wet or dry roads, conventional or radial tires provide better traction than snow or studded tires.

Snow tire selection

If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires.

Do not use tires other than stated above. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions.

CAUTION

Observe the following instruction. Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

Do not use snow tires other than the manufacturer’s recommended size, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.

Snow tire installation

Snow tires should be installed on all wheels.

Installing snow tires on the rear wheels only can lead to an excessive difference in road grip capability between the front and rear tires which could cause loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION

Do not drive with the snow tires incorrectly inflated.

Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph) with any type of snow tires.

Tire chain selection

Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location or type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.

Use SAE Class ”S” type radial tire chains, with the exception of radial cable chains or V–bar type chains.

CHASSIS

Chain installation

Install the chains on the rear tires as tightly as possible.

Do not use tire chains on the front tires. Retighten chains after driving 0.5 – 1.0 km (1/4 – 1/2 mile).

When installing chains on your tires, carefully follow the instructions of the chain manufacturer.

CAUTION

Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or the chain manufacturer’s recommended speed limit, whichever is lower.

Drive carefully avoiding bumps, holes, and sharp turns, which may cause the vehicle to bounce.

Avoid sharp turns or locked–wheel braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle handling.

When driving with chains installed, be sure to drive carefully. Slow down before entering curves to avoid losing control of the vehicle. Otherwise an accident may occur.

309

310

CHASSIS

REPLACING WHEELS

When to replace your wheels

If you have wheel damage such as bending, cracks or heavy corrosion, the wheel should be replaced.

If you fail to replace a damaged wheel, the tire may slip off the wheel or cause loss of handling control.

Wheel selection

When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.

Correct replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.

A wheel of a different size or type may adversely affect handling, wheel and bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odometer calibration, stopping ability, headlight aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or snow chain clearance to the body and chassis.

Replacement with used wheels is not recommended as they may have been subjected to rough treatment or high mileage and could fail without warning. Also, bent wheels which have been straightened may have hidden structural damage and therefore should not be used. Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.

CAUTION

Observe the following instruction. Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

Do not use wheels other than the manufacturer’s recommended size, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.

ALUMINUM WHEEL PRECAUTIONS

When installing aluminum wheels, check that the wheel nuts are tight after driving your vehicle the first 1600 km

(1000 miles).

If you have rotated, repaired, or changed your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1600 km (1000 miles).

When using tire chains, be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels.

Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrench designed for your aluminum wheels.

When balancing your wheels, use only Lexus balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer.

As with any wheel, periodically check your aluminum wheels for damage. If damaged, replace immediately.

CHASSIS

SUSPENSION AND CHASSIS

CAUTION

Do not modify the suspension/chassis with lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. It can cause dangerous handling characteristics, resulting in loss of control.

311

312

CHASSIS

SECTION

6

– 4


SPECIFICATIONS

Electrical components

Specifications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

314

Checking battery condition

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

318

Battery recharging precautions

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

320

Checking and replacing the blade type fuses

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

321

Checking the cartridge type fuses

Adding washer fluid

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

323

325

Checking the headlight aim

Replacing light bulbs

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

325

331

313

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

SPECIFICATIONS

– FUSE LOCATION

64G004b

314

1 Engine compartment

2 Passenger’s side kick panel

3 Driver’s side kick panel

4 Engine compartment

– FUSES

64G015b

Driver’s side kick panel

64G014b

Passenger’s side kick panel


64G026d


64G013e


315

316


No.

1

2

3

4

FUSE

WASHER

FR FOG

TAIL

GAUGE

5 FUEL OPN

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

PANEL

HEATER

SRS–B

D P/SEAT

RADIO

NO.2

WIPER

OBD

STOP

AMPERE

20

15

10

10

10

7.5

10

5

30

CIRCUIT

Windshield washer

Fog lights

Tail lights, Side marker lights,

License plate lights,

Parking lights

Back–up lights, Gauges and meters, service reminder indicators and buzzers

Fuel filler door opener

Emergency flashers,

Headlight cleaner

Air conditioning

Gauges and meters, service reminder indicators and warning buzzers

Power seat system

Audio, Shift lock system

15

25

7.5

15

Windshield wipers

On–board diagnosis

Stop lights,

Anti–lock brake system,

Traction control system

No.

14

15

16

17

18

D RR

DOOR

19 RR FOG

20 MIR HTR

21 S/ROOF

22

23

FUSE

CIG

ECU–IG

STARTER

IGN

ECU–B3

P P/SEAT

24 DOME

25 SEAT HTR

AMPERE

15

15

5

5

20

10

10

25

20

30

10

20

CIRCUIT

Cigarette lighter, Power outlet

Power window, Door lock system, Wireless remote control, Theft deterrent system

Starting system

Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, SRS,

Anti–lock brake system,

Vehicle stability control system,

Cruise control system

Power window system,

Door lock system,


No circuit

Outside rear view mirror

Moon roof


Door lock system,


Power seat system,

Tilt and telescopic steering

Interior lights, Personal lights,

Vanity lights, Trunk light, Clock

Seat heater

No.

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

FUSE

4WS

TV

ECU–B2

P RR

DOOR

ECU–B1

P FR

DOOR

D FR

DOOR

HORN

ETCS

AM2

36 TEL

37 TURN–HAZ

AMPERE

25

15

10

20

20

20

20

10

15

15

15

10

CIRCUIT

No circuit

No circuit

Power seat system


Door lock system,



Door lock system,

Wireless remote control,

Theft deterrent system, Trunk lid opener, Interior lights,

Personal lights, Clock,

Headlight cleaner


Door lock system,


Power window system, Door lock system, Wireless remote control

Horn

Electronic throttle control system

Starting system, Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system

No circuit

Turn signal lights


No.

38

FUSE

EFI

39

40

ALT–S

RADIO

NO.1

41 DRL NO.2

42 DRL NO.1

43

44

45

46

H–LP L

LWR

H–LP R

LWR

H–LP R

UPR

H–LP L

UPR

SPARE

AMPERE

25

5

CIRCUIT

Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, Emission control system

Charging system

Audio

30

30

30

15

15

15

15

Daytime running light system

Daytime running light system

Left–hand headlight (low beam)

Right–hand headlight (low beam)

Right–hand headlight (high beam)

Left–hand headlight (high beam)

Spare fuse

317

318


CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION

Precautions

CAUTION

BATTERY PRECAUTIONS

The battery produces flammable and explosive hydrogen gas.

Do not cause a spark by contacting the battery terminals with tools.

Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.

The electrolyte contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

Avoid contact with eyes, skin or clothes.

Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.

Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.

Keep children away from the battery.

EMERGENCY MEASURES

If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the medical office.

If electrolyte gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the contacted area. If you feel a pain or burn, get medical attention immediately.

If electrolyte gets on your clothes, there is a possibility of its soaking through to your skin, so immediately take off the exposed clothing and follow the procedure above, if necessary.

If you accidentally swallow electrolyte, drink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Then go immediately for emergency help.

Checking battery exterior

64G001a

1 Terminals 2 Hold–down clamp

Check the battery for corroded or loose connections, cracks, or loose hold–down clamps.

1. If the battery is corroded, wash it off with a solution of warm water and baking soda. Coat the terminals with grease to prevent further corrosion.

2. If the connections are loose, tighten the clamp bolts – but do not overtighten.

3. Tighten the hold–down clamp only enough to keep the battery firmly in place. Overtightening may damage the battery case.


NOTICE

Make sure the engine and all accessories are turned off before performing maintenance.

When checking the battery, remove the ground cable first and reinstall it last.

Be careful not to cause a short circuit with tools.

Take care no solution gets into the battery when washing it.

319

320


Checking battery condition

Checking by indicator

64G003a

Check the battery condition by the indicator color.

1 BLUE – Good condition.

2 WHITE – Charging necessary. Have the battery checked by your Lexus dealer.

3 RED – Have the battery checked by your Lexus dealer.

NOTICE

Do not refill the battery with water.

BATTERY RECHARGING

PRECAUTIONS

During recharging, the battery is producing hydrogen gas.

Therefore, before recharging:

1. If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.

2. Make sure the power switch on the recharger is off when connecting the charger cables to the battery and when disconnecting them.

CAUTION

Always charge the battery in an unconfined area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.

Only do a slow charge (5 A or less). Charging at a quicker rate is dangerous. The battery may explode causing personal injuries.

NOTICE

Never recharge the battery while the engine is running.

Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.


CHECKING AND REPLACING THE

BLADE TYPE FUSES

64G006a

Driver’s side kick panel

64G005–2

Engine compartment 1 Spare fuses 2 Pull–out tool

64G017

Passenger’s side kick panel

64G027


1. Turn the ignition switch off and open the fuse box lid.

Determine which fuse may be causing the problem. The lid of the fuse box shows the name of the circuit for each fuse.

321


64L013 64G008a

322

2. Make sure the inoperative component is turned off. Pull the suspected fuse straight out with the pull–out tool and check it. If it has blown, push a new fuse into the clips.

Good Blown a. Look carefully at the fuse. If the thin wire is broken, the fuse has blown. If you are not sure or if it is too dark to see, try replacing the suspected fuse with one of the same value that you know is good.

b. Install only a fuse with the amperage rating designated on the fuse box lid.

If you do not have a spare fuse, in an emergency you can pull out the ”CIG”, ”RAD NO.1” or ”OBD” fuse, which may be dispensable for normal driving, and use it if its amperage rating is the same.

If you cannot use one of the same amperage, use one lower than, but as close to the amperage as possible. If the amperage is lower than that specified, the fuse might blow out again but this does not indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get the correct fuse as soon as possible and return the substitute to its original clips.

It is a good idea to purchase a set of spare fuses and keep them in your vehicle for emergencies.

If the new fuse immediately blows out, there is a problem with the electrical system. Have your Lexus dealer correct it as soon as possible.

CAUTION

Never use a fuse with a higher amperage rating, or any other object, in place of a fuse. This may cause extensive damage and possibly a fire.


CHECKING THE CARTRIDGE TYPE

FUSES

64G019a


323

324


64g104

Good Blown

If the headlights or other electrical components do not work and the blade type fuses are O.K., check the cartridge type fuses. If any of the cartridge type fuses are blown, they must be replaced.

If there is an overload in the circuits from the battery, the fuses are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is damaged.

CAUTION

Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent for replacement. Never install an ordinary wire – even for a temporary fix. This may cause extensive damage and possibly a fire.

NOTICE

Before replacing the fuses, have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus dealer.

ADDING WASHER FLUID


CHECKING THE HEADLIGHT AIM

64G009 64G020d

If the washer tank becomes nearly empty, add washer fluid.

You may use plain water as washer fluid. However, in cold areas where temperatures range below the freezing point, use washer fluid containing antifreeze. This product is available at your Lexus dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow the manufacturer’s directions for how much to mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or any other substitute because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.

1 Beam angle gauge

(vertical movement for low beam)


(horizontal movement for low beam)


(vertical movement for high beam)


(horizontal movement for high beam)

Before checking the headlight aim:

1. Be sure that the body around the headlight is not deformed.

2. Park the vehicle on a level spot.

3. The driver gets into the driver’s seat and puts the vehicle in a state readying for a driving (with a full tank).

4. Bounce the vehicle several times.

325

326


Adjusting the headlight aiming (low beam)

64g059a

1 Adjusting bolt A

2 Adjusting bolt B

64G021b

1 Bubble 2 Acceptable range

Vertical movement gauge: The bubble of the gauge should not deviate from the center of the gauge by more than 2 marks to either side of the gauge.

If the bubble is out of the acceptable range of the beam angle gauge, adjust it using bolt A and B.


64G079a 64g078a

1. Turn the bolt A in either direction using a Phillips–head screwdriver. At this time, keep the turning direction and number of turns in mind.

2. Turn the bolt B the same number of turns and in the same direction as step 1 using a Phillips–head screwdriver.

327

328


Adjusting the headlight aiming (high beam)

64G022a

64g080a

1 Mark 2 Acceptable range

Horizontal movement gauge: The mark should not deviate by more than one mark to either side of the gauge.

It the edge of the lens is out of the acceptable range of the beam angle gauge, adjust it using bolt B.

If the error is over the value specified above, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer to adjust the headlight aim.

After adjusting the headlight in the vertical direction, check that the light has been shifted from the adjusted position in the horizontal direction.

1 Adjusting bolt A

2 Adjusting bolt B


64G081 64G082a

1 Bubble 2 Acceptable range

Vertical movement gauge: The bubble of the gauge should not deviate from the center of the gauge by more than 2 marks to either side of the gauge.

If the bubble is out of the acceptable range of the beam angle gauge, adjust it using bolt A.

Turn the bolt A in either direction using a Phillips–head screwdriver.

329

330


64G084 64g083a

1 Red line 2 Acceptable range

Horizontal movement gauge: The red line should not deviate by more than 2 blue lines to either side of the gauge.

If the red line is out of the acceptable range of the beam angle gauge, adjust it using bolt B.

Turn the bolt B in either direction using a Phillips–head screwdriver.

If the error is over the value specified above, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer to adjust the headlight aim.

REPLACING LIGHT BULBS

The illustrations on the following pages show the locations of light bulbs. If it is necessary to replace a bulb, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Use bulbs with the bulb numbers and wattage ratings given in the table.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do not replace the light bulbs while they are hot.

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and require special handling. They can burst or shatter if scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb only by its plastic or metal case. Do not touch the glass part of a bulb with bare hands.

Vehicles with discharge headlights:

Do not touch the high voltage socket when the headlights turn on. 20000 V is momentarily generated and may cause severe injury by electric shock.

Do not disassemble, repair or take apart the headlight bulbs, connector, power supply circuits and rotated components. Or you may be injured by electric shock. Call your dealer when the headlights fail to work or have to be replaced or disposed of.

NOTICE

Only use a bulb of the listed type.


The inside of the lens of exterior lights such as headlights may temporarily fog up when the lens becomes wet in the rain or in a car wash. This is not a problem because the fogging is caused by the temperature difference between the outside and inside of the lens, just like the windshield fogs up in the rain.

However, if there is a large drop of water on the inside of the lens, or if there is water pooled inside the light, contact your

Lexus dealer.

331

332


LIGHT LOCATION

64G075a

64G023b

Light Bulbs

1 Headlight (Low beam)

Discharge bulb

Halogen bulb

2 Front turn signal light

3 Headlight (High beam)

4 Parking light

5 Fog light

6 Front side marker light

Bulb No.

W

D2R

HB4

–––

HB3

–––

HB4

194

35

51

21

60

5

51

3.8

Type

A

D

B

C

D

C

D

Light Bulbs

1 Trunk light

2 High mounted stoplight

3 Tail/stop light

4 Tail light

5 Rear turn signal light

6 Back–up light

7 Tail/stop light

8 License plate light

–––

921

–––

–––

Bulb No.

W

194 3.8

–––

–––

–––

5

5/21

5/21

21

16

5/21

5

D

D

D

D

Type

D

D

D

D

64G059

Light Bulbs

1 Front personal lights

2 Vanity lights

3 Front interior lights

4 Rear personal lights

5 Door courtesy lights

6 Foot lights

7 Glove box light

Bulb No.

W

––– 8

–––

–––

––– 5

3

8

194

–––

3.8

1.4

D

D

A:

B:

C:

D:

E:

F:

––– 1.2

D

HB3 halogen bulbs

D2R discharge bulbs

HB4 halogen bulbs

Wedge base bulbs

Double end bulbs

Single end bulbs

Type

F

E

E

F


333

334


SECTION

6

– 5


SPECIFICATIONS

Body

Specifications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

336

Protecting your vehicle from corrosion

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

337

Washing and waxing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

338

Cleaning the interior

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

340

335

336

BODY

SPECIFICATIONS

– DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height

Wheelbase

Tread – Front

– Rear

Vehicle capacity weight (occupants + luggage)

*Unladen vehicle

– FUEL TANK

Capacity

4805 mm (189.2 in.)

1800 mm (70.9 in.)

1440 mm (56.7 in.)*

2800 mm (110.2 in.)

1535 mm (60.4 in.)

1510 mm (59.4 in.)

400 kg (880 lb.)

75 L (19.8 gal., 16.5 lmp.gal.)

PROTECTING YOUR VEHICLE

FROM CORROSION

Proper care of your Lexus can help ensure long–term corrosion prevention.

The most common causes of corrosion to your vehicle are:

The accumulation of road salt, dirt and moisture in hard–to–reach areas under the vehicle.

Chipping of paint or undercoating caused by minor accidents or by stones and gravel.

The following conditions will cause or accelerate corrosion of your vehicle, so it is important to keep your vehicle, particularly the underside, as clean as possible and to repair any damage to paint or protective coatings as soon as possible.

The presence of road salt or dust control chemicals, salt in the air near the sea coast, industrial air pollution.

High humidity, especially at temperatures just above freezing point.

Certain parts of your vehicle are wet or damp for an extended period of time, even though other parts of the vehicle are dry.

Components of the vehicle which do not dry quickly due to lack of proper ventilation are exposed to high ambient temperature.

BODY

To help prevent corrosion on your Lexus, follow these guidelines:

Keep your vehicle clean by regular washing.

In addition, observe the following points.

If you drive on salted roads in the winter or if you live near the ocean, you should hose off the undercarriage at least once a month to minimize corrosion.

High pressure water or steam is effective for cleaning the vehicle’s underside and wheel housings. Pay particular attention to these areas as it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It will do more harm than good to simply wet the mud and debris without removing them. The lower edge of doors, rocker panels and frame members have drain holes which should not be allowed to clog with dirt as trapped water in these areas can cause corrosion.

Wash the underside of the vehicle thoroughly when winter is over.

See ”Washing and waxing” on page 338 for more tips.

Check the condition of your vehicle’s paint and trim. If you find any chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately to prevent corrosion from starting. If the chips or scratches have gone through the bare metal, have a qualified body shop make the repair.

337

338

BODY

Check the interior of your vehicle. Water and dirt can accumulate under the floor mats and could cause corrosion.

Occasionally check under the mats to make sure the area is dry. Be particularly careful when transporting chemicals, cleansers, fertilizers, salt, etc. These should be transported in proper containers. If a spill or leak should occur, immediately clean and dry the area.

Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated garage or a roofed place. Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated garage.

If you wash your vehicle in the garage, or if you drive it covered with water or snow, your garage may be so damp as to cause corrosion. Even if your garage is heated, a wet vehicle can corrode if the ventilation is poor.

WASHING AND WAXING

Washing your Lexus

Keep your vehicle clean by regular washing.

The following cases may cause weakness to the paint or corrosion to the body and parts. Wash your vehicle as soon as possible.

When driving in a coastal area

When driving on a road sprinkled with antifreeze

When exposed to coal tar, tree sap, bird droppings and carcass of an insect

When driving in areas where there is a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust or chemical substances

When the vehicle becomes remarkably dirty with dust and mud

Hand–washing your Lexus

Work in the shade and wait until the vehicle body is not hot to the touch.

1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Remove any mud or road salt from the underside of the vehicle or in the wheel wells.

2. Wash with a mild car–wash soap, mixed according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and keep it wet by dipping it frequently into the wash water. Do not rub hard – let the soap and water remove the dirt.

Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic wheel ornaments are damaged easily by organic substances. If any organic substance splashes an ornament, be sure to wash it off with water and check if the ornament is damaged.

CAUTION

Do not attach the heavily damaged plastic wheel ornament. It may fly off the wheel and cause accidents while the vehicle is moving.

Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent.

Urethane bumpers and side moldings: Wash carefully. Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper and side molding faces are soft.

Road tar: Remove with turpentine or cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces.

NOTICE

Do not use organic substances (gasoline, kerosene, benzine or strong solvents), which may be toxic or cause damage.

3. Rinse thoroughly – dried soap can cause streaking. In hot weather you may need to rinse each section right after you wash it.

4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle using a clean soft cotton towel. Do not rub or press hard – you might scratch the paint.

BODY

Automatic car wash

Your vehicle may be washed in an automatic car wash, but remember that the paint can be scratched by some types of brushes, unfiltered washing water, or the washing process itself. Scratching reduces paint durability and gloss, especially on darker colors. The manager of the car wash should be able to advise you whether the process is safe for the paint on your vehicle.

Waxing your Lexus

Polishing and waxing is recommended to maintain the original beauty of your Lexus’ finish.

Apply wax once a month or if the vehicle surface does not repel water well.

1. Always wash and dry the vehicle surface before you begin waxing, even if you are using a combined cleaner and wax.

2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If the finish has become extremely weathered, use a car–cleaning polish, followed by a separate wax. Carefully follow the manufacturer ’s instructions and precautions. Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim as well as the paint.

3. Wax the vehicle again when water does not bead but remains on the surface in large patches.

339

340

BODY

CLEANING THE INTERIOR

CAUTION

Be careful not to splash water or spill liquid on the floor. This may prevent the SRS side airbags from activating correctly, resulting in serious injury.

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water, or allow water to get onto the floor when cleaning the vehicle interior or exterior. Water may get into audio components or other electrical components above or under the floor carpet (or mat) and cause a malfunction; and it may cause body corrosion.

Leather Interior

The selected leather is used in your Lexus. Due to characteristics of leather products, some parts of leather may be rough, uneven or scratched originally.

To keep good appearance, we recommend you to clean it periodically twice a year.

Remove dirt on the leather in the following ways:

1. Wipe it off lightly using a soft cloth (e.g. gauze) dampened with 5% solution of neutral detergent for wool.

2. Wring water from a clean cloth and thoroughly wipe off all traces of detergent with it.

3. Wipe off the surface of the leather with a dry soft cloth. Allow the leather to dry in a ventilated shaded area. Excess of wet may cause the hardening or shrinking of the leather.

NOTICE

Dirt or sand adhered to the leather may damage the treated surface and cause it to wear earlier. Remove dirt or sand using a vacuum cleaner.

If a stain should fail to come out with a neutral detergent, apply a cleaner that does not contain an organic solvent.

Never use organic substances such as benzine, alcohol or gasoline, or alkaline or acid solutions for cleaning the leather as these could cause discoloring.

Use of a nylon brush or synthetic fiber cloth, etc. may scratch the fine grained surface of the leather.

Mildew may develop on soiled leather upholstery. Be especially careful to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your upholstery always clean.

Long exposure to direct sunlight may cause the leather surface to harden and shrink. Keep your vehicle in a shaded area, especially in the summer.

The interior of your vehicle is apt to heat up on hot summer days, so avoid placing on the upholstery items made of vinyl or plastic or containing wax as these tend to stick to leather when warm.

Improper cleaning of the leather upholstery could result in discoloration or staining.

Synthetic Leather Areas

(Dash and sun visors)

The synthetic leather areas may be easily cleaned with a mild soap or detergent and water.

First vacuum over the upholstery to remove loose dirt. Then, using a sponge or soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the synthetic leather. After allowing it to soak in for a few minutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt and wipe off the soap with a clean damp cloth. If all the dirt does not come off, repeat the procedure. Commercial foaming–type cleaners are also available which work well. Follow the manufacturer ’s instructions.

NOTICE

Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline or window cleaner on the interior.

BODY

Carpets, Windows and Seat Belts

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove as much dirt as possible. Several types of foam cleaners are available; some are in aerosol cans and others are powders or liquids which you mix with water to produce a foam. To shampoo the carpets, use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water – the best results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible. Read the shampoo instructions and follow them closely.

The seat belts may be cleaned with mild soap and water or with lukewarm water.

Use a cloth or sponge. As you are cleaning, check the belts for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.

NOTICE

Use a good foam–type shampoo to clean the carpets.

Do not use dye or bleach on the belts – it may weaken them.

Do not use the belts until they become dry.

The windows may be cleaned with any household window cleaner.

When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires.

341

342

BODY

Air Conditioning Control Panel, Audio,

Instrument Panel, Console Panel, and

Switches

Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.

Soak a clean soft cloth in water or lukewarm water then lightly wipe off any dirt.

NOTICE

Do not use organic substances (solvents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.

These chemicals can cause discoloring, staining or peeling of the surface.

If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make sure their ingredients do not include the substances mentioned above.

If you use a liquid car freshener, do not spill the liquid onto the vehicle’s interior surfaces. It may contain the ingredients mentioned above. Immediately clean any spill using the method mentioned above.

If you have any questions about the cleaning of your

Lexus, your local Lexus dealer will be pleased to answer them.

SECTION

7

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

FOR U.S. OWNERS

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

344

343

344

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S. OWNERS

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

FOR U.S. OWNERS

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National

Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A.,

Inc. (Toll–free: 1–800–25–LEXUS).

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A.,

Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto

Safety Hotline toll–free at 1–800–424–9393 (or

366–0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to:

NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation,

Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.

cm–1

You should know as much about the quality and importance of proper maintenance of your new vehicle as the people who built it.

The Lexus authorized Repair Manual tells you how to maintain your vehicle and enables you to correctly perform your own maintenance.

The best way to keep your new vehicle in top running order is to maintain it properly from the moment you drive it off the showroom floor.

The Lexus authorized Repair Manual is packed with literally everything you need to know to perform your own maintenance in virtually every area of your new vehicle.

cm–2

Maintenance procedures for the engine, chassis, body, electrical system, and more, are clearly explained and illustrated.

Periodic maintenance and tune–up

Where to obtain the

Repair Manual

Periodic maintenance and tune–up helps to prevent small problems from growing into larger ones later on. The repair manual outlines exactly what maintenance is required and clearly explains how to do the work yourself step–by–step.

Areas covered include such things as spark plug replacement, valve clearance adjustment and engine oil and filter replacement.

The repair manual for GS430, GS300 may be purchased from any Lexus dealer or call the Material Distribution Center. To purchase the repair manual, please contact your Lexus dealer or the Material Distribution Center toll–free at

1–800–622–2033.